JP2022109810A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suppress peeling of a design layer from a game board.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 11ab having a cell sheet 11b on the front surface and a game ball guiding member provided on the front surface of the game board 11ab. The game board 11ab has an opening PH1 that makes a display screen 31a visible. The game ball guiding member includes a left structure body B1 and an upper structure body B3 that guide game balls so as not to enter the opening PH1. The left structure body B1 and the upper structure body B3 cover the front end of the opening PH1 so that the game balls do not come into contact with the front end of the opening PH1. A gap G1 is provided between the left structure body B1 and the upper structure body B3. The game balls cannot come into contact with the front end of the opening PH1 from the gap G1.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 14

Description

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 1. Field of the Invention The present invention relates to a game machine provided with a game board having a design layer forming a design on its front surface.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a game machine provided with a game board having a design layer forming a design on its front surface (see Patent Document 1).
This game machine is provided with an acrylic plate (game substrate) having a surface decorative sheet (design layer) on the front surface. In particular, the acrylic plate is provided with a first attachment hole provided at a position corresponding to the effect display device, and a center accessory provided so as to surround the first attachment hole. Further, the acrylic plate is provided with a second mounting hole provided at a position corresponding to the general prize winning opening, and a general prize winning opening formed in the second mounting hole.

JP 2015-58345 A

However, in the conventional game machine, there is a possibility that the design layer may come off from the game board. Here, if the design layer is peeled off from the game board, game balls may be caught in the design layer peeled off from the game board, resulting in ball clogging.
In particular, in the conventional game machine, when the center accessory is composed of a plurality of members, the game ball contacts the front end (periphery) of the first mounting hole in the gap between the plurality of members, causing the acrylic Peeling of the surface decorative sheet from the plate may occur. In addition, the surface decorative sheet may be peeled off from the acrylic plate when the game ball entering the general winning hole contacts the front end (periphery) of the second mounting hole.
An object of the present invention is to suppress peeling of the design layer from the game board.

To achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to a first invention comprises a game board having a design layer forming a design on the front surface, a game ball guiding member provided on the front surface of the game board, and the game board. a display means provided on a rear surface, the game board has a first opening for making the display means visible, and the game ball guiding member is provided so as not to enter the first opening. An eleventh game ball guide member and a twelfth game ball guide member for guiding a game ball are included, and the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member are arranged so that the game ball reaches the front end of the first opening. The front end of the first opening is covered so as not to contact the , and a predetermined gap is provided between the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member, and the game ball and the front end of the first opening cannot be contacted through the predetermined gap.
In the gaming machine according to the first invention, the front end of the first opening is covered by the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the first opening. As a result, the front end (peripheral edge) of the first opening is pressed by the rear surfaces of the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member, making it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer.
In particular, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, the game ball is prevented from contacting the front end (periphery) of the first opening through the gap between the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member. It's becoming This makes it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer due to contact of the game ball in the gap between the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member.
As described above, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, it is possible to suppress peeling of the design layer from the game board.
Here, the design layer corresponds to a later-described cell sheet 11b (or paint according to a modification). A game board 11ab, which will be described later, corresponds to the game board. The game ball guide member corresponds to a left structure B1, a right structure B2, an upper structure B3, and a lower structure B4, which will be described later. A display screen 31a, which will be described later, corresponds to the display means. The first opening corresponds to an opening PH1, which will be described later. As the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member, two adjacent structures among the left structure B1, right structure B2, upper structure B3, and lower structure B4, which will be described later, correspond. do. The predetermined gaps correspond to gaps G1 to G3, which will be described later.

A game machine according to a second invention comprises a game board having a design layer forming a design on the front surface thereof, and a game ball guiding member provided on the front surface of the game board, wherein the game board receives the game balls. Having a passable second opening, said game ball guiding member includes a 21st game ball guiding member for guiding a game ball to flow into said second opening, said 21st game ball The guide member covers the front end of the second opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with a predetermined lower portion of the front end of the second opening.
In the game machine according to the second invention, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost while preventing the design layer from peeling off from the game board.
In other words, when only suppressing peeling of the design layer from the game board is taken into consideration, it is preferable that the entire front end (periphery) of the second opening is covered with the 21st game ball guiding member. However, if the entire front end (periphery) of the second opening is covered with the 21st game ball guide member, the structure of the 21st game ball guide member becomes complicated, and the 21st game ball guide member is constructed. The amount of material required for manufacturing increases, increasing manufacturing costs.
Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the second invention, the 21st game ball guiding member covers the front end of the second opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with a predetermined lower portion of the front end of the second opening. and That is, a part of the front end (periphery) of the second opening is covered with the 21st game ball guiding member. As a result, the structure of the 21st game ball guide member can be simplified, and the amount of material required for constructing the 21st game ball guide member can be reduced, making it possible to reduce the manufacturing cost. Become.
Here, if a predetermined portion of the front end (periphery) of the second opening is not covered by the 21st game ball guiding member, the predetermined portion may be affected by the contact of the game ball. Peeling of the design layer may occur.
Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the second invention, a predetermined lower part of the front end (periphery) of the second opening is covered with the 21st game ball guiding member so that the game ball does not come into contact with it. In other words, a predetermined upper part of the front end (periphery) of the second opening is not covered by the 21st game ball guide member so that the game ball can come into contact with it. As a result, the front end (periphery) of the curled-up design layer is pressed by the weight of the game ball flowing into the ball entrance at a predetermined upper portion, thereby suppressing peeling of the design layer.
As described above, in the game machine according to the second invention, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost while preventing the design layer from peeling off from the game board.
Here, the design layer corresponds to a later-described cell sheet 11b (or paint according to a modification). A game board 11ab, which will be described later, corresponds to the game board. The 21st game ball guiding member corresponds to another winning opening structure B5, which will be described later. The second openings correspond to openings PH3 to PH6, which will be described later. The predetermined lower portion corresponds to a covering portion, which will be described later. The predetermined upper portion corresponds to a non-coated portion NC, which will be described later.

A gaming machine according to a third invention comprises a game board having a design layer forming a design on the front surface thereof, and display means provided on the front surface of the game board, wherein the game board extends from the display means. It has a third opening through which a harness (electric wire) is inserted, and the display means covers the entire opening edge (front end) of the third opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with the opening edge (front end) of the third opening. characterized by covering the
In the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the display means covers the entire front end of the third opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the third opening. As a result, the entire front end (periphery) of the third opening is pressed by the back surface of the display means, making it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer.
Here, the design layer corresponds to a later-described cell sheet 11b (or a coating material according to a modification). A game board 11ab, which will be described later, corresponds to the game board. A fourth pattern display device 61, which will be described later, corresponds to the display means. An opening PH2, which will be described later, corresponds to the third opening.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect of the invention comprises a game board having a design layer forming a design on the front surface thereof, and a prize winning device provided on the front surface of the game board, wherein the game board enters the prize winning device. It has a fourth opening through which the hit game ball passes, and the prize-winning device is configured to cover the entire opening edge (front end) of the fourth opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with the opening edge (front end) of the fourth opening. characterized by covering the
In the gaming machine according to the fourth invention, the winning device covers the entire front end of the fourth opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the fourth opening. As a result, the entire front end (peripheral edge) of the fourth opening is pressed by the back surface of the prize winning device, making it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer.
Here, the design layer corresponds to a later-described cell sheet 11b (or paint according to a modification). A game board 11ab, which will be described later, corresponds to the game board. A composite winning device 70, which will be described later, corresponds to the winning device. An opening PH7, which will be described later, corresponds to the fourth opening.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect of the present invention comprises a game board having a design layer forming a design on the front surface thereof, and a game ball guiding member provided on the front surface of the game board, wherein the game board is provided with a game ball. It has a fifth opening through which it can pass, said game ball guiding member includes a 51st game ball guiding member for guiding a game ball to flow into said fifth opening, said 51st game ball The guide member is characterized by covering the entire opening edge (front end) of the fifth opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with the opening edge (front end) of the fifth opening.
In the gaming machine according to the fifth invention, the entire front end of the fifth opening is covered by the fifty-first game ball guiding member so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the fifth opening. As a result, the entire front end (peripheral edge) of the fifth opening is pressed by the back surface of the 51st game ball guide member, making it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer.
Here, the design layer corresponds to a later-described cell sheet 11b (or paint according to a modification). A game board 11ab, which will be described later, corresponds to the game board. As the fifty-first game ball guiding member, a starting opening structure B6, which will be described later, corresponds. An opening PH8, which will be described later, corresponds to the fifth opening.

A gaming machine according to a sixth aspect of the invention comprises a game board having a design layer forming a design on the front surface thereof, and a game ball guiding member provided on the front surface of the game board, wherein the game board is provided with a game ball. It has a passable sixth opening, and the game ball guiding member includes a 61st game ball guiding member and a 62nd game ball guiding member for guiding a game ball to flow into the sixth opening. The 61st game ball guiding member and the 62nd game ball guiding member cover the front end of the sixth opening so that the game ball does not contact the front end of the sixth opening, and the 61st game ball A predetermined gap is provided between the guide member and the 62nd game ball guide member, and the game ball cannot contact the front end of the sixth opening through the predetermined gap. It is characterized by
In the gaming machine according to the sixth invention, the front end of the sixth opening is covered by the 61st game ball guide member and the 62nd game ball guide member so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the sixth opening. As a result, the front end (periphery) of the sixth opening is pressed by the rear surfaces of the 61st game ball guide member and the 62nd game ball guide member, making it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer.
In particular, in the gaming machine according to the sixth invention, the game ball is prevented from contacting the front end (periphery) of the sixth opening through the gap between the 61st game ball guide member and the 62nd game ball guide member. It's becoming This makes it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer due to the contact of the game ball in the gap between the 61st game ball guide member and the 62nd game ball guide member.
As described above, in the gaming machine according to the sixth invention, it is possible to suppress peeling of the design layer from the gaming board.
Here, the design layer corresponds to a later-described cell sheet 11b (or a coating material according to a modification). A game board 11ab, which will be described later, corresponds to the game board. The sixth opening corresponds to an opening PH9, which will be described later. As the 61st game ball guide member and the 62nd game ball guide member, a starting opening structure B6 and an inner rail 12, which will be described later, correspond. A gap G4, which will be described later, corresponds to the predetermined gap.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress peeling of the design layer from the game board.

1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the first opening/closing member 80 arranged at the closed position; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the first opening/closing member 80 arranged at the minimum open position; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the first opening/closing member 80 arranged at the maximum open position; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the second opening/closing member 90 arranged at the closed position; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the second opening/closing member 90 arranged at the minimum open position; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the second opening/closing member 90 arranged at the maximum open position; FIG. 12 is an enlarged view showing the firing handle unit; FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the firing handle unit with the face cover removed; It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of an operation ring and a front frame unit. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of an operation ring and an inner frame unit. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of setting an operation torque according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of setting an operation torque according to Example 2; 2 is a front view of the game board 11; FIG. It is a front view of a game board 11ab. 15 is an enlarged view of a portion indicated by an arrow A in FIG. 14; FIG. 15 is an enlarged view of a portion indicated by an arrow B in FIG. 14; FIG. 15 is an enlarged view of the portion indicated by arrow C in FIG. 14; FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of an out port 58 and a first starting port 51; FIG. It is a perspective view showing the state of the other winning openings 55a to 55e viewed from above. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the insides of other winning openings 55a to 55e, the first starting opening 51, and the composite winning device 70; It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of an outer rail. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the arrangement of guide holes gh in the outer rail; It is a cross-sectional view of the rail base. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 1; 27 is an enlarged view of FIG. 26; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control system of a pachinko machine. 3 is a block diagram showing configurations of a firing condition detection circuit and a firing control circuit; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a production|presentation control board. 4 is a flowchart showing CPU initialization processing; 4 is a flowchart showing main loop processing; 7 is a flow chart showing saving processing at power-off. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing dynamic port output processing; 4 is a flowchart showing performance display device output processing. 8 is a flowchart showing setting-related processing; 4 is a flowchart showing switch management processing; It is a flow chart which shows normal figure starting ball detection processing. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 starting ball detection process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 starting ball detection process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process. It is a flow chart showing a special game management process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation waiting process. It is a flow chart showing processing during special figure fluctuation. 7 is a flow chart showing a number cutting management process; It is a flowchart which shows processing during a special figure stop. It is a flow chart showing a first big winning opening pre-opening process. It is a flow chart showing a first big winning opening opening control process. It is a flow chart showing a first big winning opening closing effective process. It is a flow chart showing a wait process for the end of the opening of the first big winning opening. It is a flow chart which shows a second big prize winning opening pre-opening process. It is a flow chart which shows a second big winning opening opening control process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd big winning a prize mouth closing effective process. It is a flow chart showing a waiting process for the end of opening the second big winning opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a special electric service open/close switching process; It is a flow chart showing normal game management processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during normal figure stop. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product opening pre-processing. 10 is a flowchart showing normal electric open/close switching processing; It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessory opening control processing. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product closing effective processing. It is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product open end wait processing. 4 is a flowchart showing performance display device control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing sub timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command reception processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing prefetch command reception processing; 9 is a flow chart showing variation command reception processing. 9 is a flowchart showing stop command reception processing; 9 is a flowchart showing opening command reception processing;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1. FIG.

(Overall Configuration of Pachinko Machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 includes an outer frame unit 2, a body frame unit (not shown), and a game board unit 10.
The outer frame unit 2 includes a rectangular frame (outer frame). The outer frame unit 2 (outer frame) is fixed to the island facilities of the game arcade.
The body frame unit includes an inner frame unit 3 (inner frame) and a front frame unit 4 (front frame). The body frame unit (body frame) is attached to the outer frame unit 2 via a hinge mechanism. The body frame unit is arranged on the front side of the outer frame unit 2 . This allows the body frame unit to open and close the front side of the outer frame unit 2 .
The inner frame unit 3 includes a rectangular frame (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is attached to the outer frame unit 2 via a hinge mechanism. The inner frame unit 3 is arranged on the front side of the outer frame unit 2 . A game board unit 10 is attached to the inner frame unit 3. - 特許庁This allows the inner frame unit 3 to open and close the front side of the outer frame unit 2 .
The front frame unit 4 includes a rectangular frame (front frame). The front frame unit 4 is attached to the outer frame unit 2 via a hinge mechanism. The front frame unit 4 is arranged on the front side of the inner frame unit 3 . Thereby, the front frame unit 4 can open and close the front side of the inner frame unit 3 (in particular, the front side of the game board unit 10 attached to the inner frame unit 3).
Further, the front frame unit 4 includes a pair of transparent plates g1 and g2. The pair of transparent plates g1 and g2 are arranged substantially in the center of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) when viewed from the front side. A pair of transparent plates g1 and g2 are arranged in parallel along the depth direction. Each of the transparent plates g1 and g2 is made of a transparent material such as resin or glass and formed in a flat plate shape.
Furthermore, the front frame unit 4 includes a decoration unit DU, a saucer unit SU, and a firing handle unit 6. The decoration unit DU, the saucer unit SU and the firing handle unit 6 are attached to the front of the front frame unit 4 (front frame).
In particular, the decoration unit DU and the saucer unit SU are detachably attached to the front frame unit 4 .

(Configuration of decoration unit DU)
Next, the configuration of the decoration unit DU will be described.
The decoration unit DU is arranged so as to surround the transparent plates g1 and g2. The decoration unit DU includes a design portion (decorative portion) 40, a speaker 22 (see FIG. 28), and a frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 28).
The design portion 40 is arranged around the transparent plates g1 and g2. The design portion 40 is made of a resin material and has a shape that bulges (protrudes) toward the front side. At each upper corner of the design portion 40, a sound elimination portion 4c is provided. Each sound removal portion 4c is provided with a plurality of sound removal holes through which the sound output by the speaker 22 is passed.
The speaker 22 is arranged inside each sound removing portion 4c. The frame lamp 20 is arranged inside the design portion 40 . The frame lamp 20 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

(Configuration of saucer unit SU)
Next, the configuration of the receiving tray unit SU will be described.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the first opening/closing member 80 arranged in the closed position. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the first opening/closing member 80 arranged at the minimum open position. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the first opening/closing member 80 arranged at the maximum open position. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the second opening/closing member 90 arranged in the closed position. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the second opening/closing member 90 arranged at the minimum open position. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the second opening/closing member 90 arranged at the maximum open position.
The saucer unit SU is arranged below the transparent plates g1 and g2.
The receiving tray unit SU includes a receiving tray capable of storing game balls (rental balls/prize balls) paid out by a game ball payout device 440, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the tray includes two trays (upper tray 8 and lower tray 9).
Here, when the number of game balls stored in the upper tray 8 has not reached a predetermined number (when the upper tray 8 is not in a full state), the game balls paid out by the game ball dispensing device 440 are When the number of game balls stored in the upper tray 8 reaches a predetermined number (when the upper tray 8 is full), the game balls paid out by the game ball payout device 440 are It flows into the saucer 9.
The upper receiving plate 8 is formed in a dish shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper receiving plate 8 extends along the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the upper receiving plate 8 is inclined so that the left side is higher and the right side is lower when viewed from the front side. As a result, the game balls that have flowed into the upper tray 8 flow down the bottom surface of the upper tray 8 from left to right. In the following description, when viewed from the front side, the left side of the upper tray 8 is referred to as the "upstream side" of the path along which the game balls flow, and the right side of the upper tray 8 is referred to as the "downstream side" of the path along which the game balls flow. do. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the upper receiving tray 8 from a first payout hole 8a, which will be described later, flows down the bottom surface of the upper receiving tray 8 from the upstream side toward the downstream side.
A first discharge hole 8a and a first discharge hole 8b are provided in the wall surface of the upper tray 8 on the back side.
The first payout hole 8a is provided at the upstream end of the upper tray 8 (the upstream end of the path along which the game ball flows down). The game balls paid out by the game ball payout device 440 flow into the upper receiving tray 8 from the first payout hole 8a.
The first discharge hole 8b is provided at the downstream end of the upper tray 8 (the downstream end of the path along which the game ball flows). The game balls stored in the upper tray 8 can be discharged out of the upper tray 8 through the first discharge holes 8b. Specifically, the first discharge hole 8b is connected to a second discharge hole 9a, which will be described later, via a guideway (not shown) provided on the back side of the upper tray 8. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball discharged from the first discharge hole 8b passes through the guide path and flows into the lower tray 9 from the second discharge hole 9a. Thereby, it is possible to discharge the game ball from the upper tray 8 to the lower tray 9 through the first discharge hole 8b.
In particular, the first discharge hole 8b is configured to have dimensions that allow the game balls to pass through (discharge) one by one. That is, the first discharge hole 8b is configured with dimensions that make it impossible to pass (discharge) two or more game balls at the same time. In this embodiment, the inner diameter of the first discharge hole 8b is 14 [mm].

As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, a first opening/closing member 80 capable of opening and closing the first discharge hole 8b is provided on the rear side of the upper tray 8. As shown in FIGS. Here, FIGS. 2 to 4 show the state of the upper receiving tray 8 viewed from the rear side (that is, the state of the first discharge hole 8b viewed from the rear side).
The first opening/closing member 80 is an opening/closing member that is opened and closed non-electrically (manually) without using an actuator. The first opening/closing member 80 includes a body portion 81 , an opening/closing piece portion 82 and a connection portion 83 .
The body portion 81 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction. The body portion 81 is provided with two guide holes 81a arranged in the left-right direction. Each guide hole 81a is a through hole penetrating along the depth direction. Each guide hole 81a is provided to have a predetermined length along the left-right direction. In addition, mechanical ends 8c corresponding to the respective guide holes 81a are provided on the rear surface of the upper receiving plate 8. As shown in FIG. Each mechanical end 8c is formed in a cylindrical shape and is provided so as to protrude from the rear surface of the upper receiving plate 8 toward the rear surface side. A mechanical end 8c corresponding to the guide hole 81a is inserted into each guide hole 81a.
The opening/closing piece 82 is formed in a bar shape extending in the left-right direction. The opening/closing piece portion 82 is provided so as to protrude rightward from the right end of the main body portion 81 .
The connecting portion 83 is provided so as to protrude leftward from the left end of the body portion 81 . The connecting portion 83 is provided with a connecting hole 83a. The connecting hole 83a is a through hole penetrating along the depth direction. The connecting hole 83a is provided to have a predetermined length along the vertical direction. An output shaft 88d, which will be described later, is inserted into the connecting hole 83a.
The first opening/closing member 80 is arranged on the left side of the first discharge hole 8b when viewed from the rear side. The first opening/closing member 80 can be displaced in the left-right direction within a range from the closed position (see FIG. 2) to the maximum open position (see FIG. 4).
When the first opening/closing member 80 is arranged at the closed position, the first discharge hole 8b is closed by the opening/closing piece 82, and the game ball cannot pass through the first discharge hole 8b.
When the first opening/closing member 80 is displaced from the closed position toward the left (maximum open position side), the closing of the first discharge hole 8b by the opening/closing piece 82 is gradually released, and the first discharge hole 8b is gradually opened. be done. At this time, when the first opening/closing member 80 is arranged at the minimum open position (see FIG. 3), the opening width of the first discharge hole 8b becomes substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball, and the opening of the first discharge hole 8b by the game ball. Passing is possible. Then, when the first opening/closing member 80 is arranged at the maximum open position, the entire first discharge hole 8b is opened.
That is, when the first opening/closing member 80 is arranged on the right side (closed position side) of the minimum open position as viewed from the back side, it becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through the first discharge hole 8b. On the other hand, when the first opening/closing member 80 is arranged on the left side of the minimum open position (maximum open position side) as viewed from the back side, it becomes possible for the game ball to pass through the first discharge hole 8b. As a result, the first opening/closing member 80 is arranged at the minimum open position, so that the minimum opening width that allows the game ball to pass through (discharge) is secured as the opening width of the first discharge hole 8b.

A first ball release button 85 is provided on the side of the upper tray 8 . The first ball eject button 85 includes an operation portion 85a and a pushing piece portion 85b.
The operation portion 85a is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The pushing piece portion 85b is formed in a bar shape. The pushing piece portion 85b is fixed to the bottom surface of the operating portion 85a. At this time, the pushing piece portion 85b is provided so as to extend downward from the bottom surface of the operating portion 85a.
The first ball eject button 85 is arranged such that the operating portion 85a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the receiving tray unit SU. The first ball ejection button 85 can be operated by the player. Specifically, the first ball eject button 85 is provided so as to be displaceable along the vertical direction. Then, the player can displace the first ball extraction button 85 along the upward direction by pushing the operation portion 85a downward. In particular, the player can displace the lower end portion of the push-in piece 85b downward by pushing the operation portion 85a downward.
The first ball eject button 85 can be vertically displaced (performs a pushing operation) within a range from the initial position (see FIG. 2) to the lowest position (see FIG. 4). .
The first ball release button 85 is connected to the first opening/closing member 80 via a bellcrank (direction changing mechanism) 88 . As a result, the vertical displacement of the first ball eject button 85 can be converted into the horizontal displacement of the first opening/closing member 80 .
The bellcrank 88 includes an input side crank arm 88a, an output side crank arm 88b, and a rotating shaft 88c. Each crank arm 88a, 88b is formed like a rod. The bellcrank 88 is configured by connecting an input side crank arm 88a and an output side crank arm 88b in a substantially "<" shape (boomerang shape). The input side crank arm 88a and the output side crank arm 88b are connected at a predetermined angle (for example, 90 degrees). Further, in the bellcrank 88, a rotary shaft 88c is provided at the connecting portion between the input side crank arm 88a and the output side crank arm 88b.
In particular, in the bellcrank 88, the length of the output side crank arm 88b is longer than the length of the input side crank arm 88a. This makes it possible to increase the ratio of the amount of displacement (movement) of the first opening/closing member 80 to the amount of operation of the first ball extraction button 85 .

The rotating shaft 88c is arranged to extend along the depth direction. The bellcrank 88 is configured to be rotatable around a rotation shaft 88c.
The input-side crank arm 88a is arranged to extend substantially along the left-right direction. As a result, the tip of the input side clamp arm 88a is displaced in the vertical direction as the bell clamp 88 rotates.
The output-side crank arm 88b is arranged to extend substantially in the vertical direction. As a result, the position of the tip of the output side clamp arm 88b is displaced in the left-right direction as the bell clamp 88 rotates. An output shaft 88d is provided at the tip of the output side crank arm 88b. The output shaft 88d is arranged to extend along the depth direction.

The lower end of the pushing piece 85b is arranged so as to contact the upper surface of the tip of the input side clamp arm 88a. An output shaft 88d provided at the tip of the output-side crank arm 88b is inserted into a connecting hole 83a provided at the left end of the first opening/closing member 80. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the first opening/closing member 80 is biased toward the right side (closed position side) as viewed from the rear side by the coil spring sp.
As a result, when the operation portion 85a of the first ball removal button 85 is not operated, the first opening/closing member 80 is arranged at the closed position and the first ball removal button 85 is arranged at the initial position. Therefore, the game balls cannot pass through the first discharge hole 8b, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 are not discharged.
Specifically, when the operation portion 85a of the first ball extracting button 85 is not operated, the coil spring sp biases the first opening/closing member 80 toward the right side (closed position side) as viewed from the rear side, The left inner surface of the guide hole 81a contacts the mechanical end 8c. As a result, the displacement (displacement to the right) of the first opening/closing member 80 is restricted (prevented) by the mechanical ends 8c, and the position of the first opening/closing member 80 is maintained at the closed position. In addition, as the first opening/closing member 80 is biased toward the right side (closed position side) as viewed from the back side, the tip of the output side crank arm 88b is pulled toward the right side, and the bell crank 88 rotates counterclockwise, and the tip of the input-side crank arm 88a pushes the pushing piece 85b upward. As a result, the first ball release button 85 is arranged at the initial position.

When the operation portion 85a is pushed downward from the state where the first ball release button 85 is arranged at the initial position, the first opening/closing member 80 is moved to the left side of the closed position (maximum open position side) as viewed from the rear side. ). At this time, the greater the amount of operation (the amount of pushing) of the operating portion 85a, the greater the amount of displacement of the first opening/closing member 80. As a result, the amount of opening (opening width) of the first discharge hole 8b increases.
Specifically, when the operation portion 85a is pushed downward from the state where the first ball eject button 85 is arranged at the initial position, the lower end of the pushing piece portion 85b pushes down the tip portion of the input side crank arm 88a. As a result, the bellcrank 88 rotates clockwise as viewed from the rear side, the tip of the output side crank arm 88b moves leftward, and the output shaft 88d provided at the tip of the output side crank arm 88b moves. pulls the first opening/closing member 80 toward the left side (maximum open position side). As a result, the first opening/closing member 80 is displaced from the closed position toward the left side (toward the maximum open position), and the closing of the first discharge hole 8b by the opening/closing piece 82 is released.
When the first opening/closing member 80 is displaced to the minimum open position by pushing the operating portion 85a, the game balls are allowed to pass through the first discharge hole 8b, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 are released. It is discharged from the first discharge hole 8b. Here, in the following description, the position of the first ball extraction button 85 when the first opening/closing member 80 is arranged at the minimum open position is referred to as "specific position". That is, when the first ball release button 85 is arranged at a specific position by pushing the operation part 85a, the first opening/closing member 80 is arranged at the minimum open position, and the game ball can pass through the first discharge hole 8b. Then, the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 are discharged from the first discharge hole 8b.
As a result, when the first ball extraction button 85 is arranged above the specific position (initial position side), it becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through the first discharge hole 8b. On the other hand, when the first ball ejection button 85 is arranged below the specific position (lowermost position side), it becomes possible for the game ball to pass through the first discharge hole 8b. As a result, the first ball ejection button 85 is arranged (pushed in) at a specific position, and the minimum opening width that enables the passage (ejection) of the game ball is secured as the opening width of the first ejection hole 8b. be done.

Furthermore, when the first ball release button 85 is pushed to the lowest position, the first opening/closing member 80 is arranged at the maximum open position. That is, when the first ball release button 85 is pushed to the lowest position, the inner surface on the right side of each guide hole 81a comes into contact with the mechanical end 8c as viewed from the rear side. As a result, the displacement (leftward displacement) of the first opening/closing member 80 is restricted (prevented) by each mechanical end 8c, and the displacement (leftward displacement) of the first opening/closing member 80 is controlled up to the maximum closed position. Accordingly, the displacement (downward displacement) of the first ball extraction button 85 is limited to the lowest position.
Then, when the pushing operation part 85a is stopped from the state where the first ball extracting button 85 is arranged at the lowest position, the first opening/closing member 80 is returned to the closed position by the force of the coil spring sp. The first ball removal button 85 is returned to the initial position.
As described above, the player can discharge the game balls stored in the upper receiving tray 8 to the lower receiving tray 9 through the first discharge hole 8b by pressing the first ball ejection button 85 (operation portion 85a). It has become.

The lower receiving plate 9 is formed in a dish shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the lower receiving plate 9 extends along the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the lower receiving plate 9 is inclined so that the left side is higher and the right side is lower when viewed from the front side. As a result, the game balls that have flowed into the lower receiving tray 9 flow down the bottom surface of the lower receiving tray 9 from left to right. In the following description, when viewed from the front side, the left side of the lower receiving tray 9 is referred to as the "upstream side" of the path along which the game balls flow, and the right side of the lower receiving tray 9 is referred to as the "downstream side" of the path along which the game balls flow. do. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the lower receiving tray 9 from a second payout hole 9a, which will be described later, flows down the bottom surface of the lower receiving tray 9 from the upstream side toward the downstream side.
A wall surface on the back side of the lower tray 9 is provided with a second dispensing hole 9a. Further, the bottom surface of the lower tray 9 is provided with a second discharge hole 9b.
The second payout hole 9a is provided at the upstream end of the lower receiving tray 9 (the upstream end of the path along which the game ball flows down). The game balls paid out by the game ball payout device 440 (when the upper tray 8 is full) and the game balls discharged from the first discharge hole 8b flow into the lower tray 9 from the second payout hole 9a. do.
The second discharge hole 9b is provided at the downstream end of the lower tray 9 (the downstream end of the path along which the game ball flows). The game balls stored in the lower receiving tray 9 can be discharged out of the lower receiving tray 9 through the second discharge holes 9b. In this embodiment, the game balls stored in the lower tray 9 are discharged from the second discharge hole 9b to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (specifically, the dollar box placed below the lower tray 9). It is possible. The game balls stored in the lower receiving tray 9 may be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b to the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a counting device for counting game balls).
In particular, the dimensions of the second discharge holes 9b are larger than the dimensions of the first discharge holes 8b. As a result, the second discharge hole 9b allows more game balls to pass through at the same time than the first discharge hole 8b. In other words, the number of game balls that can pass through the second discharge hole 9b at the same time is greater than the number of game balls that can pass through the first discharge hole 8b at the same time. Specifically, the second discharge hole 9b is configured to have dimensions that allow two or more (in this embodiment, five) game balls to pass through (discharge) at the same time. In this embodiment, the inner diameter of the second discharge hole 9b is 25 [mm].

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the bottom surface of the lower tray 9 is provided with a second opening/closing member 90 capable of opening and closing the second discharge hole 9b. Here, FIGS. 5 to 7 show the state of the lower receiving tray 9 viewed from below (bottom side) (that is, the state of the second discharge hole 8b viewed from below (bottom side)).
The second opening/closing member 90 is an opening/closing member that is opened and closed non-electrically (manually) without using an actuator. The second opening/closing member 90 includes a disk-shaped opening/closing plate portion 91 . The second opening/closing member 90 can be displaced in the left-right direction within a range from the closed position (see FIG. 5) to the maximum open position (see FIG. 7).
When the second opening/closing member 90 is arranged at the closed position, the second discharge hole 9b is entirely closed by the opening/closing plate portion 91, making it impossible for the game ball to pass through the second discharge hole 9b.
When the second opening/closing member 90 is displaced from the closed position toward the maximum open position, the closing of the second discharge hole 9b by the opening/closing plate portion 91 is gradually released, and the second discharge hole 9b is gradually opened. At this time, when the second opening/closing member 90 is arranged at the minimum open position (see FIG. 6), the opening width of the second discharge hole 9b becomes substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball, and the second discharge hole 9b is opened by the game ball. Passing is possible. In particular, when the second opening/closing member 90 is arranged at the minimum open position, it becomes possible to pass (discharge) game balls one by one from the second discharge hole 9b. Then, when the second opening/closing member 90 is arranged at the maximum open position, the entire second discharge hole 9b is opened. In particular, when the second opening/closing member 90 is arranged at the maximum open position, it is possible to simultaneously pass (discharge) two or more game balls (five balls in this embodiment) from the second discharge hole 9b. becomes.
In other words, when the second opening/closing member 90 is arranged closer to the closed position than the minimum open position, it becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through the second discharge hole 9b. On the other hand, when the second opening/closing member 90 is arranged from the minimum open position to the maximum open position, it becomes possible for the game ball to pass through the second discharge hole 9b. As a result, the second opening/closing member 90 is arranged at the minimum open position, so that the minimum opening width that allows passage (discharging) of game balls is ensured as the opening width of the second discharge hole 9b.

A second ball release button 95 is provided on the front surface of the lower tray 9 . The second ball eject button 95 is configured including an operating portion 95a formed in a strip shape.
The second ball eject button 95 is arranged such that the operation portion 95a protrudes from the front surface of the lower tray 9 toward the front side. The second ball ejection button 95 can be operated by the player. Specifically, the second ball eject button 95 is provided so as to be displaceable along the depth direction. The player can displace the second ball extraction button 95 along the depth direction by pushing the operation portion 95a toward the depth side.
The second ball eject button 95 can be displaced along the depth direction (perform a pushing operation) within a range from the initial position (see FIG. 5) to the lowest position (see FIG. 7). .

The second ball release button 95 is connected to the second opening/closing member 90 via a direction changing mechanism (not shown). As a result, the displacement of the second ball eject button 95 along the depth direction can be converted into the displacement of the second opening/closing member 90 along the left-right direction.
The second opening/closing member 90 is biased toward the right side (closed position side) as viewed from below by biasing means (not shown) such as a coil spring. As a result, when the operation portion 95a of the second ball eject button 95 is not operated, the second opening/closing member 90 is arranged at the closed position and the second ball extract button 95 is arranged at the initial position. Therefore, the game balls cannot pass through the second discharge hole 9b, and the game balls stored in the lower receiving tray 9 are not discharged.
When the operation part 95a is pushed inward from the state where the second ball ejection button 95 is arranged at the initial position, the second opening/closing member 90 is moved to the left side (maximum open position) from the closed position as viewed from below. side). At this time, as the amount of operation (push amount) of the operation portion 95a increases, the amount of displacement of the second opening/closing member 90 increases, and as a result, the opening amount (open width) of the second discharge hole 9b increases.
When the second opening/closing member 90 is displaced to the minimum open position by pushing the operating portion 95a, the game balls can pass through the second discharge hole 9b, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 9 are released. It is discharged from the second discharge hole 9b. Here, in the following description, the position of the second ball extraction button 95 when the second opening/closing member 90 is arranged at the minimum open position is referred to as "specific position". That is, when the second ball release button 95 is arranged at a specific position by pushing the operation part 95a, the second opening/closing member 90 is arranged at the minimum open position, allowing the game ball to pass through the second discharge hole 9b. Then, the game balls stored in the lower tray 9 are discharged from the second discharge hole 9b.
As a result, when the second ball ejection button 95 is arranged on the front side (initial position side) of the specific position, it becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through the second discharge hole 9b. On the other hand, when the second ball ejection button 95 is arranged on the back side (lowest position side) from the specific position, it becomes possible for the game ball to pass through the second discharge hole 9b. As a result, the second ball ejection button 95 is arranged (pushed in) at a specific position, and the minimum opening width that enables the passage (ejection) of the game ball is secured as the opening width of the second discharge hole 9b. be done.
Furthermore, when the second ball release button 95 is pushed to the lowest position, the second opening/closing member 90 is arranged at the maximum open position. As a result, the entire second discharge hole 9b is opened, and two or more game balls (five balls in this embodiment) can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b at the same time.
Then, when the operation portion 95a is stopped being pushed from the state where the second ball extracting button 95 is arranged at the lowest position, the second opening/closing member 90 is returned to the closed position due to the force of the force-disengaging means. , the second ball release button 95 is returned to the initial position.
As described above, the player pushes the second ball ejection button 95 (operation portion 95a) to eject the game balls stored in the lower receiving tray 9 from the second ejection hole 9b to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (specifically, can be discharged into a dollar box placed below the lower tray 9 .

In particular, in this embodiment, the dimensions of the second discharge holes 9b are larger than the dimensions of the first discharge holes 8b. That is, the second discharge hole 9b is capable of allowing more game balls to pass through (discharge) at the same time than the first discharge hole 8b. As a result, the receiving tray (upper receiving tray 8 and lower receiving tray 9) is filled with game balls (full), and an abnormal state in which the game balls paid out by the game ball dispensing device 440 cannot be sent to the receiving tray (hereinafter referred to as "full tank error") ) occurs, it is possible to quickly cancel the full tank error.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the first ball ejection button 85 is operated in an amount equal to or less than (less than) the diameter of the game ball (approximately 11 [mm]) so that the game ball can pass through the first discharge hole 8b (the first 1 discharge hole 8b to be able to discharge the game ball).
Specifically, the first ball ejection button 85 is operated by 4 [mm], and the state in which the game ball can pass through the first ejection hole 8b (the state in which the game ball can be ejected from the first ejection hole 8b). It is possible to
That is, the operation amount for displacing the first ball eject button 85 from the initial position to the specific position is 4 [mm]. In other words, the first ball eject button 85 can be arranged at a specific position by pushing it 4 [mm] from the initial position.
As a result, the game ball can be discharged from the upper receiving tray 8 with a small amount of operation.
Further, in the present embodiment, the second ball ejection button 95 is in a state in which the game ball can pass through the second ejection hole 9b (the game ball can be discharged).
In particular, with regard to the second ball ejection button 95, the second ejection hole 9b can be operated with an operation amount smaller than the operation amount of the first ball ejection button 85 required to enable the game ball to be ejected from the first ejection hole 8b. can be set to a state in which the game ball can pass through (a state in which the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b). In other words, the operation amount (minimum The operation amount) is the operation amount ( minimum operation amount).
Specifically, the second ball ejection button 95 is operated by 3 [mm] to allow the game ball to pass through the second ejection hole 9b (the state in which the game ball can be ejected from the second ejection hole 9b). It is possible to
That is, the operation amount for displacing the second ball eject button 95 from the initial position to the specific position is 3 [mm]. In other words, the second ball eject button 95 can be arranged at a specific position by pushing it 3 [mm] from the initial position. In particular, "the operation amount for displacing the second ball eject button 95 from the initial position to the specific position"<"the operation amount for displacing the first ball eject button 85 from the initial position to the specific position".
As a result, the game ball can be ejected from the lower receiving tray 9 with a small amount of operation. In particular, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the second ball removal button 95, which enables efficient ball removal, when the player is required to quickly remove the ball from the receiving tray, such as when a full tank error occurs. becomes.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second ball ejection button 95 is operated with an operation load smaller than the operation load of the first ball ejection button 85 required to enable the game ball to be ejected from the first ejection hole 8b. It is possible to put the second ejection hole 9b in a state in which the game ball can pass through (the state in which the game ball can be ejected from the second ejection hole 9b). In other words, the operation load (minimum The operation load) is the operation load ( minimum operating load).
Specifically, with respect to the first ball eject button 85, an operation load of 4 [N] allows the game ball to pass through the first ejection hole 8b (a state in which the game ball can be ejected from the first ejection hole 8b). It is possible to
That is, the operation load required to displace the first ball eject button 85 from the initial position to the specific position is 4 [N]. In other words, the first ball eject button 85 arranged at the initial position can be arranged at a specific position by pushing it with a force of 4 [N].
On the other hand, for the second ball ejection button 95, with an operation load of 2 [N], the second ejection hole 9b is put in a state in which the game ball can pass (a state in which the game ball can be ejected from the second ejection hole 9b). is possible.
That is, the operation load required to displace the second ball eject button 95 from the initial position to the specific position is 2 [N]. In other words, the second ball eject button 95 arranged at the initial position can be arranged at a specific position by pushing it with a force of 2 [N]. In particular, "the operation load required to displace the second ball eject button 95 from the initial position to the specific position"<"the operation load required to displace the first ball eject button 85 from the initial position to the specific position" ”.
As a result, the ball can be removed from the second ball removal button 95 with an operation load smaller than that of the first ball removal button 85 . Therefore, when the player is required to quickly remove the ball from the receiving tray, such as when a full tank error occurs, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the second ball removal button 95, which enables efficient ball removal. It becomes possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum operation amount of the second ball removal button 95 is larger than the maximum operation amount of the first ball removal button 85 . That is, the amount of operation of the second ball release button 95 required to open the second ejection hole 9b to the upper limit (maximum) is the amount required to open the first ejection hole 8b to the upper limit (maximum). is greater than the operation amount of the first ball eject button 85.
That is, the operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the first ball extraction button 85 from the initial position to the lowest position is equal to or less than (less than) the diameter of the game ball. Specifically, the operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the first ball eject button 85 from the initial position to the lowest position is 6 [mm]. In other words, the first ball eject button 85 can be placed at the lowest position by pushing it 6 [mm] from the initial position.
On the other hand, the operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the second ball extraction button 95 from the initial position to the lowest position is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball (excess). Specifically, the operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the second ball eject button 95 from the initial position to the lowest position is 14.5 [mm]. In other words, the second ball ejection button 95 can be placed at the lowest position by pushing it 14.5 [mm] from the initial position. In particular, "operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the second ball eject button 95 from the initial position to the lowest position">"operation for displacing the first ball eject button 85 from the initial position to the lowest position amount (maximum operation amount)".
As a result, of the two ball ejection buttons (first ball ejection button 85 and second ball ejection button 95), the ball ejection button (second ball ejection button 95) having a large maximum amount of operation has a game ball ejection efficiency. It becomes a high ball release button. Therefore, the player can intuitively select the ball removal by the second ball removal button 95 when the ball is required to be quickly removed from the receiving tray, such as when a full tank error occurs. .

In addition, the tray unit SU includes various operating means that can be operated by the player.
In this embodiment, as various operation means, there are a production button 5b, a rotary selector 5c, a light amount adjustment button (not shown), a volume adjustment button (not shown), a cross key button (not shown), and the like. ing.
The effect button 5b includes an operation section that can be pressed by the player, and a button switch 25 (see FIG. 28) that detects the pressing operation of the operation section. The button switch 25 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 (see FIG. 28) each time the operation unit is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called “jog dial”) includes an operating section that can be rotated by the player, and a dial switch 26 (see FIG. 28) that detects the rotating operation of the operating section. The dial switch 26 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the operating portion is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60[°]).

The light amount adjustment button consists of two operating sections (first operating section and second operating section) that can be pressed by the player, and a light amount adjusting switch 27 (see FIG. 28) that detects the pressing operation of each operating section. and The light amount adjustment switch 27 outputs a first detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the first operation unit is pressed down, and each time the second operation unit is pressed down, the second A detection signal is output to the effect control board 300 .
The volume adjustment button consists of two operation units (first operation unit and second operation unit) that can be pressed by the player, and a volume adjustment switch 28 (see FIG. 28) that detects the pressing operation of each operation unit. and The volume adjustment switch 28 outputs a first detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the first operation unit is pressed down, and each time the second operation unit is pressed down, the second detection signal is output. A detection signal is output to the effect control board 300 .
The cross key button consists of four operation units (up key button, down key button, left key button, and right key button) that can be pressed by the player, and a cross key switch that detects the pressing operation of each operation unit. 29 (see FIG. 28). The cross key switch 29 outputs a first detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the upper key button is pressed, and outputs a second detection signal each time the lower key button is pressed. output to the effect control board 300, every time the left key button is pressed, a third detection signal is output to the effect control board 300, and every time the right key button is pressed, the fourth A detection signal is output to the effect control board 300 .

Further, a lending operation section 7 is arranged on the upper surface of the receiving tray unit SU. The rental operation unit 7 has a ball rental button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to a CR unit 700 capable of reading and updating information recorded on the prepaid card. Then, when a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 700, the remaining credits of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 700 are displayed on the count display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated while the prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit 700, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper receiving tray 8.例文帳に追加At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded in the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls paid out, and the updated remaining frequency of the valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the return button 7b is operated while the prepaid card with the remaining credit of the valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit 700, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 700. - 特許庁
Here, the prepaid cart includes, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a storage IC built-in medium, and the like.

(Configuration of firing handle unit 6)
Next, the configuration of the firing handle unit 6 will be described.
FIG. 8 is an enlarged view showing the firing handle unit. FIG. 9 is a perspective view showing the firing handle unit with the face cover removed.
Here, FIG. 8(a) shows a state in which an operation ring 72, which will be described later, is arranged at the initial position, and FIG. 8(b) shows a state in which the operation ring 72 is arranged at the maximum position. .
A shooting handle unit 6 is provided on the body frame. Specifically, the shooting handle unit 6 is provided so as to protrude from the front of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) toward the front side. The firing handle unit 6 is arranged on the side of the saucer unit SU.
As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the firing handle unit 6 includes a handle base 71, an operation ring 72, a coil spring 73, a face cover 74, and a firing stop button 77.

The handle base 71 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and fixed to the front surface of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). The handle base 71 is provided with a rotary shaft 71a and three guide shafts 71b. The rotating shaft 71a is provided along the central axis of the handle base 71 which is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The three guide shafts 71b are provided around the rotating shaft 71a.
The operation ring 72 is rotatably attached to the handle base 71 . The operation ring 72 includes a ring portion 72a and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) finger hook portions fa, fb, and fc provided on the outer peripheral surface of the ring portion 72a.
The ring portion 72a is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape (substantially annular/substantially ring shape) having an open top surface and a bottom surface.
The finger hooks fa, fb, and fc are provided so as to protrude outward from the outer peripheral surface of the ring portion 72a. The three finger hooks fa, fb, and fc are provided at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction of the ring portion 72a. The three finger hooks fa, fb, and fc have different sizes. In particular, the three finger hook portions fa, fb, and fc have different amounts of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the ring portion 72a (hereinafter simply referred to as "protrusion amounts"). That is, the amount of protrusion is the dimension (height) from the outer peripheral surface of the ring portion 72a to the vertex (radial vertex) of each of the finger hook portions fa, fb, and fc.

In this embodiment, of the three finger hooks fa, fb, and fc aligned in the left-right direction when the operation ring 72 is located at the initial position, the finger hook fa on the left protrudes. The finger hooking portion fc, which is provided on the right side, has the largest amount of protrusion, and the finger hooking portion fb, which is provided in the middle, has the smallest protrusion amount than the finger hooking portion fa. It is larger than the part fc.
In other words, of the three finger hooks fa, fb, and fc arranged in the vertical direction when the operation ring 72 is located at the maximum position, the finger hook fa provided on the upper side has a protruding amount. The finger hooking portion fc, which is the largest and is provided on the lower side, has the smallest amount of protrusion, and the finger hooking portion fb, which is provided in the middle, has a smaller protrusion amount than the finger hooking portion fa, and the finger hooking portion larger than fc.
That is, the protruding amounts of the finger hooking portions fa, fb, and fc are, in descending order, finger hooking portion fa, finger hooking portion fb, and finger hooking portion fc (large protrusion amount→small protrusion amount). there is

A bearing hole (not shown) and a pair of guide holes 72b are provided in the bottom surface of the ring portion 72a. The bearing hole is provided along the central axis of the substantially cylindrical ring portion 72a. Each guide hole 72b is an elongated through hole curved along the circumferential direction. The pair of guide holes 72b are arranged 180° out of phase around the bearing hole.
The coil spring 73 has one end engaged with a receiving portion (not shown) of the handle base 71 and the other end engaged with a receiving portion (not shown) of the operation ring 72 . A coil spring 73 biases the operation ring 72 toward the initial position.
The face cover 74 is formed in a substantially hemispherical shape. The face cover 74 is attached to the tip of each guide shaft 71b by screwing. As a result, the operation ring 72 is rotatably held between the handle base 71 and the face cover 74 . The face cover 74 covers (conceals) the open top surface of the ring portion 72a.
A firing stop button 77 is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the handle base 71 . The shooting stop button 77 can be pressed by the player.

The operation ring 72 is attached to the handle base 71 with the rotary shaft 71a inserted through the bearing hole and the guide shaft 71b inserted through the guide hole 72b. As a result, the operation ring 72 is rotatable with respect to the handle base 71 around the rotary shaft 71a. At this time, the rotation range of the operation ring 72 is restricted by the guide shaft 71b inserted through the guide hole 72b.
That is, as described above, the operating ring 72 is always biased counterclockwise when viewed from the front side by the elastic force of the coil spring 73 . Therefore, when the operation ring 72 is not rotated, one end surface of each guide hole 72b contacts the guide shaft 71b. As a result, the counterclockwise rotation of the operation ring 72 is restricted, and the operation ring 72 is placed (stationary) at the initial position.
On the other hand, the operation ring 72 can be rotated clockwise when viewed from the front side by being rotated against the bias (elastic force) of the coil spring 73 . Then, when the amount of clockwise rotation of the operation ring 72 reaches a predetermined amount, the other end surface of each guide hole 72b comes into contact with the guide shaft 71b. As a result, the clockwise rotation of the operating ring 72 is restricted, and the operating ring 72 is placed (stationary) at the maximum position.
On the other hand, when the rotating operation of the operating ring 72 is finished (stopped), the operating ring 72 is returned to the initial position by the biasing (elastic force) of the coil spring 73 .
As described above, the operation ring 72 can be rotated by the player. At this time, the player can easily rotate the operation ring 72 by putting his/her fingers on the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc.
In particular, the operation ring 72 can be rotated (displaced/operated) within a range from the initial position (see FIG. 8(a)) to the maximum position (see FIG. 8(b)).
As will be described later, the game area 30 includes a left path (left hitting area) formed on the left side of the image display device 31 and a right path formed on the right side of the image display device 31 as paths along which game balls flow. (right hitting area) and are configured.
A game ball shot by the game ball shooting device 430 in response to the rotation operation of the operation ring 72 passes through a shooting passage (not shown) and flows into the game area 30 . At this time, when the momentum of the shot game ball is weak, the game ball that has passed through the shooting passage flows into the left path. On the other hand, when the momentum of the shot game ball is strong, the game ball that has passed through the shooting passage passes through a guide passage (not shown) and flows into the right path.

The firing handle unit 6 includes a firing volume 411 (see FIG. 28), a touch sensor 412 (see FIG. 28), and a firing stop switch 413 (see FIG. 28).
The firing volume 411 is configured with a variable resistor. The firing volume 411 detects the amount of rotational manipulation of the manipulation ring 72 (the angle by which the manipulation ring 72 is rotationally manipulated). Specifically, the firing volume 411 includes a rotating shaft (not shown) and a resistor (not shown) whose resistance value changes according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the rotating shaft. there is The rotation axis of the firing volume 411 is coaxially fixed to the bearing hole of the operation ring 72 . As a result, the rotary shaft of the firing volume 411 is rotated according to the rotational operation of the operation ring 72 , and the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes according to the rotational operation amount of the operation ring 72 .
The firing volume 411 is electrically connected to the operation detection section 421 (see FIG. 29). The operation detection unit 421 detects the rotation operation (rotation operation amount) of the operation ring 72 based on the change in the resistance value (voltage value) of the ejection volume 411 .

The touch sensor 412 detects contact (holding) of the operation ring 72 by the player based on changes in capacitance. Then, the touch sensor 412 outputs a touch signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (see FIG. 29) when the player's contact with the operation ring 72 is detected (the touch signal is set to a high level). do). On the other hand, the touch sensor 412 stops outputting the touch signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (makes the touch signal low level) when the player's contact with the operation ring 72 is not detected.
The firing stop switch 413 detects pressing operation of the firing stop button 77 . Then, the firing stop switch 413 outputs a firing stop signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 when the pressing operation of the firing stop button 77 is not detected (sets the firing stop signal to a high level). On the other hand, the firing stop switch 413 stops outputting the firing stop signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (making the firing stop signal low level) when the pressing operation of the firing stop button 77 is detected.

(Positional relationship between operation ring 72 and body frame)
Next, the positional relationship between the operation ring 72 and the body frame will be described.
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the operation ring and the front frame unit. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the operation ring and the inner frame unit.
In this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is placed at the initial position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) do not protrude below the lower edge of the body frame. That is, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state where the operation ring 72 is arranged at the initial position, the finger hook portions fa, fb, and fc (top portions) are aligned with the lower edges of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). does not protrude below Further, as shown in FIG. 11, when the operation ring 72 is arranged at the initial position, the finger hook portions fa, fb, and fc (top portions) are aligned with the lower edges of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame). does not protrude below
Further, in this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is placed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) do not protrude below the lower edge of the body frame. That is, when the operation ring 72 is placed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) do not protrude below the lower edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). . Further, when the operation ring 72 is arranged at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) do not protrude below the lower edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame). .
As a result, even when the body frame is placed on the floor or the like, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc do not come into contact with the floor or the like, and damage to the firing handle unit 6 (operation ring 72) can be prevented. It becomes possible.
In particular, in this embodiment, even when the operation ring 72 is arranged (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) are Does not protrude below the lower edge of the frame. In other words, even when the operation ring 72 is placed (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) are aligned with the front frame unit 4 (front not protrude below the lower edge of the frame). In addition, even when the operation ring 72 is arranged (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) are aligned with the inner frame unit 3 (inner not protrude below the lower edge of the frame).
This makes it possible to more reliably prevent damage to the firing handle unit 6 (operation ring 72).

Further, in this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is placed at the initial position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) do not protrude rightward beyond the right edge of the body frame. That is, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state where the operation ring 72 is arranged at the initial position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) are positioned above the right edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). does not protrude to the right. Further, as shown in FIG. 11, when the operation ring 72 is placed at the initial position, each finger hooking portion fa, fb, fc (top portion) is positioned from the right edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame). does not protrude to the right.
Further, in this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is placed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) do not protrude rightward beyond the right edge of the body frame. That is, when the operation ring 72 is placed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) do not protrude rightward beyond the right edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). . Further, when the operation ring 72 is arranged at the maximum position, each of the finger hook portions fa, fb, and fc (top portion) does not protrude rightward beyond the right edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame). .
As a result, even if the body frame accidentally collides with a wall or the like, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc do not come into contact with the wall or the like, preventing damage to the firing handle unit 6 (operation ring 72). can be prevented.
In particular, in this embodiment, even when the operation ring 72 is arranged (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) are Does not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the frame. That is, in a state where the operation ring 72 is arranged (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) are aligned with the front frame unit 4 (front frame) does not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the frame. Further, even when the operation ring 72 is arranged (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (top portions) are aligned with the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame) does not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the frame.
This makes it possible to more reliably prevent damage to the firing handle unit 6 (operation ring 72).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the finger hooking portion fa, which has the largest protrusion amount among the three finger hooking portions fa, fb, and fc, is protruded when the operation ring 72 is arranged at the maximum position. It is configured so as not to be located at the lowest point in the rotation orbit.
Here, the "rotational trajectory of the finger hook fa" is the trajectory drawn by the finger hook fa as the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position.
In this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is arranged at the initial position, the finger hooking portion fa is arranged at the lowest point in the rotational orbit of the finger hooking portion fa. Further, when the operation ring 72 is arranged at the maximum position, the finger hooking portion fa is arranged at a position higher than the lowest point of the rotational orbit of the finger hooking portion fa.
This makes it easier for the player to put his/her finger on the finger-holding portion fa, and as a result, the operation ring 72 can be easily rotated.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the dimension (distance) D1 from the rotation center (rotational axis 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the apex of the finger hook portion fa is set to 53.4 [mm]. there is Also, the dimension (distance) D2 from the center of rotation (rotating shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the top of the finger hook portion fb is set to 45.6 [mm]. Also, the dimension (distance) D3 from the center of rotation (rotating shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the apex of the finger hook portion fc is set to 39.3 [mm]. Also, the dimension (distance) E from the center of rotation (rotating shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the edge (end in the radial direction) of the ring portion 72a is set to 34.6 [mm].
In particular, the dimension (distance) F from the rotation center (rotating shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the lower edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) is set to 40.0 [mm]. Also, the dimension (distance) G from the rotation center (rotating shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the right edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) is set to 49.1 [mm].
As a result, dimension D3<dimension F<dimension G, and when the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the apex of the finger hook portion fc is positioned above the edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). It no longer protrudes outward. Also, the dimension D2<the dimension G, and when the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the apex of the finger hook portion fb protrudes outward from the edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). no more to do.
Furthermore, the dimension (distance) H from the rotation center (rotating shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the lower edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame) is set to 45.0 [mm]. Also, the dimension (distance) I from the rotation center (rotating shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the right edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame) is set to 51.1 [mm].
As a result, dimension D3<dimension H<dimension I, and when the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the apex of the finger hook portion fc is positioned above the edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame). It no longer protrudes outward. Also, the dimension D2<the dimension I, and when the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the apex of the finger hook portion fb protrudes outward from the edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame). no more to do.

(Operation torque of operation ring 72)
Next, the operating torque of the operating ring 72 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the operation torque according to the first embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of operation torque according to the second embodiment.
In the following description, the operation torque required to start rotating the operation ring 72 from the initial position is referred to as "first operation torque". That is, the first operation torque is the operation torque required for starting the movement of the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position. Therefore, when the operation torque (the operation torque toward the maximum position side) acting on the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position reaches the first operation torque, the operation ring 72 rotates toward the maximum position side. Start.
Further, the operation torque required to rotate the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the left-handed reference position is referred to as "second operation torque". That is, the second operation torque is the operation torque required to displace the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position to the left-handed reference position. Therefore, when the second operation torque (the operation torque toward the maximum position) acts on the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position, the operation ring 72 rotates from the initial position to the left-handed reference position.
Here, the "left-handed reference position" is the position of the operation ring 72 that allows the game ball to be shot to the left-hand path, which will be described later. In particular, the left-handed reference position is the position of the operation ring 72 that makes it possible to stably shoot the game ball to the left-hand path. In this embodiment, the center (center) position (angle) of the range (angle) of the operation ring 72 from which the game ball is to be shot with respect to the left path is defined as the left-handed reference position.

Further, the operation torque required to rotate the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the maximum position is referred to as "third operation torque". That is, the third operation torque is the operation torque required to displace the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position to the maximum position. Therefore, when the third operation torque (the operation torque toward the maximum position side) acts on the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position, the operation ring 72 rotates from the initial position to the maximum position.
In this embodiment, the maximum rotation position and the right-handed reference position match. The "right-handed reference position" is the position of the operation ring 72 that allows the game ball to be shot to the right-hand path, which will be described later. In particular, the right-handed reference position is the position of the operation ring 72 at which the game ball can be stably shot to the right path.
Note that the maximum rotation position and the right-handed reference position may not match each other. That is, as the right-handed reference position, the center position (angle) of the range (angle) of the operation ring 72 from which the game ball is shot to the right-hand path may be defined. do not have.

In this embodiment, the second operation torque is larger than the first operation torque. Also, the third operation torque is larger than the second operation torque. In particular, the third operation torque is less than or equal to twice the second operation torque.
As a result, the difference between the second operation torque and the third operation torque becomes small, and the operation ring 72 is at the left-handed reference position relative to the operation torque when the operation ring 72 is rotated from the initial position to the left-handed reference position. to the maximum position (right-handed reference position), the operation torque does not suddenly increase. Therefore, the player's fatigue due to the operation of the operation ring 72 is suppressed, and the burden on the player can be reduced.
Further, in the present embodiment, the second operation torque is twice or less than the first operation torque.
As a result, the difference between the first operation torque and the second operation torque becomes small, and the operation ring 72 moves from the initial position to the left-handed reference position with respect to the operation torque required for the operation ring 72 to start moving from the initial position. A sudden increase in the operating torque during rotation is eliminated. Therefore, the player's fatigue due to the operation of the operation ring 72 is suppressed, and the burden on the player can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 12, in Example 1, the first operation torque = 6.8 [N mm], the second operation torque = 13.6 [N mm], the third operation torque = 23.8 [N・mm].
Further, as shown in FIG. 13, in Example 2, the first operation torque=27.2 [N.mm], the second operation torque=54.4 [N.mm], and the third operation torque=95.2. [N·mm].
On the other hand, in the comparative example, the first operation torque=31.0 [N.mm], the second operation torque=69.0 [N.mm], and the third operation torque=152.0 [N.mm]. there is
As a result, in Examples 1 and 2, compared with the comparative example, the operation torque curve (curve indicating the relationship between operation torque and position) can be flattened, and the operation ring 72 can be rotated from the initial position to the maximum position. When operating, the operation torque does not suddenly increase, and the burden on the player can be reduced.
In particular, in the first embodiment, as compared with the second embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is rotated from the initial position to the maximum position, the amount of change in the operation torque is small, so the burden on the player can be further reduced. becomes.

(Rotation angle of operation ring 72)
Next, the rotation angle of the operation ring 72 will be explained.
In the following description, the operation angle (rotational angle) of the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the left-handed reference position will be referred to as a "first operation angle". That is, when the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position is rotated by the first operation angle (rotated toward the maximum position side), the operation ring 72 is arranged at the left-handed reference position.
Further, the operation angle (rotational angle) from the initial position to the maximum position of the operation ring 72 is defined as a "second operation angle". That is, when the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position is rotated by the second operation angle (rotated toward the maximum position side), the operation ring 72 is arranged at the maximum position.
In this embodiment, the first operation angle is within the range of 45° to 60°, and the second operation angle is within the range of 100° to 120°. In particular, the first operation angle is half or less than the second operation angle.
This makes it possible for the player to easily shoot the game ball to the right path.

(Configuration of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
14 is a front view of the game board 11. FIG. FIG. 15 is a front view of the game board 11ab. 16 is an enlarged view of the portion indicated by arrow A in FIG. 14. FIG. 17 is an enlarged view of a portion indicated by an arrow B in FIG. 14. FIG. 18 is an enlarged view of the portion indicated by arrow C in FIG. 14. FIG. FIG. 19 is an enlarged view of the out port 58 and the first starting port 51. FIG. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a state in which the other prize winning openings 55a to 55e are viewed from above. FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing the insides of the other winning ports 55a to 55e, the first starting port 51 and the composite winning device 70. FIG.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached inside the inner frame provided in the inner frame unit 3 . Thereby, the game board unit 10 is arranged on the back side of the front frame unit 4 . A player can visually recognize a game board 11 (game area 30), which will be described later, through the transparent plates g1 and g2. In this embodiment, a game area 30, which will be described later, is formed between the back surface of the transparent plate g2 arranged on the back side of the pair of transparent plates g1 and g2 and the front surface of the game board 11. FIG.
The game board unit 10 includes a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various effect devices (image display device 31, movable unit, etc.) attached to the set board. ing.
The set plate is formed in a box shape with an open front side. An opening formed by a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the back plate of the set plate.

The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set board.
As shown in FIG. 14, the game board 11 includes a game board 11ab and various components attached to the game board 11ab.
The game board 11ab is composed of a board 11a and a cell sheet 11b (design layer) attached to the front surface (front surface) of the board 11a. As a result, the front surface of the game board 11ab is decorated with the cell sheet 11b.
The substrate 11a is made of acrylic resin, plywood, plywood, or the like, and has a flat plate shape.
The cell sheet (design sheet/decorative sheet) 11b is arranged to decorate (add design to) the front surface of the substrate 11a. The cell sheet 11b is formed in a film shape (sheet shape) from cellulose resin or the like. A design (design/pattern) is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the cell sheet 11b by silk printing.
In this embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) of the game board 11ab, various components include a windmill W, a nail (not shown), an inner rail 12, a rail base 13, an outer rail 14, a left structure B1, and a right structure. A body B2, an upper structure B3, a lower structure B4, a fourth pattern display device 61, another winning opening structure B5, a starting opening structure B6, a composite winning device 70 and the like are attached. Various components are attached (arranged) to the front side (front side) of the cell sheet 11b in the game board 11ab.

(Manufacturing process of game board 11)
Here, the manufacturing process of the game board 11 will be described.
In the manufacturing process of the game board 11, first, a rectangular substrate 11a in a plan view and a cell sheet 11b on which a design is printed in advance are prepared. Next, glue is applied to the front surface of the substrate 11a. Then, a cell sheet 11b is pasted on the front surface of the substrate 11a by a cell pasting machine. Thus, the game board 11ab is formed.
In the manufacturing process of the game board 11, next, various openings (through holes/openings) are formed in the game board 11ab by a punching machine. Further, various pre-holes (non-through holes) for arranging nails and pinwheels W are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the game board 11ab by a gauge press machine.
The various openings are through holes (openings) that penetrate the game board 11 (the substrate 11a and the cell sheet 11b). As shown in FIG. 15, in the present embodiment, among the various openings provided in the game board 11ab, the openings (openings) provided in the game area 30 are an opening PH1 for the image display device 31, a second Opening PH2 for 4 pattern display device 61, openings PH3 to PH6 for other winning ports 55a to 55e, opening PH7 for composite winning device 70, opening PH8 for first starting port 51, for out port 58 An opening PH9, an opening for a screw (not shown), and the like are formed.
Here, in the present embodiment, various openings (through holes/openings) are formed in the game board 11ab. As a result, various openings (through holes/openings) are formed at the same positions in the cell sheet 11b and the substrate 11a. Therefore, for each opening, the peripheral edge of the opening in the cell sheet 11b and the peripheral edge of the opening in the substrate 11a match.

The opening PH1 is provided at a position corresponding to the display screen 31a of the image display device 31 arranged on the back side (rear side) of the game board 11ab (set board). As a result, the player can view the display screen 31a (various images displayed on the display screen 31a) through the opening PH1 and an opening (not shown) provided in the set plate. It's becoming
The opening PH2 is an opening for arranging the fourth pattern display device 61 . Specifically, the opening PH2 is an opening for inserting a harness (electric wire) extending from the fourth pattern display device 61 .
The opening PH3 is an opening that constitutes the other winning opening 55a. Specifically, the opening PH3 is an opening for allowing the game ball entering the other winning opening 55a to pass through to the back side of the game board 11 (game board 11ab).
The opening PH4 is an opening that constitutes the other winning openings 55b and 55c. Specifically, the opening PH4 is an opening for allowing the game balls entering the other winning holes 55b and 55c to pass through to the back side of the game board 11 (game board 11ab).

The opening PH5 is an opening that constitutes the other winning opening 55d. Specifically, the opening PH5 is an opening for allowing the game ball entering the other winning opening 55d to pass through to the back side of the game board 11 (game board 11ab).
The opening PH6 is an opening that constitutes the other winning opening 55e. Specifically, the opening PH6 is an opening for allowing the game ball entering the other winning opening 55e to pass through to the back side of the game board 11 (game board 11ab).
The opening PH7 is an opening for arranging the composite winning device 70 . Specifically, the opening PH7 allows insertion of harnesses (electric wires) extending from various switches and sensors included in the composite winning device 70, as well as various ball entrances (specifically, the second 2 starting opening 52, big winning opening 53, operation opening 54, and other winning opening 55f), it is an opening for passing the game ball entered to the back side of the game board 11 (board 11a).
The opening PH8 is an opening that constitutes the first starting port 51 . Specifically, the opening PH8 is an opening for allowing the game ball entered into the first starting hole 51 to pass through to the back side of the game board 11 (game board 11ab).
The opening PH9 is an opening that constitutes the out port 58 . Specifically, the opening portion PH9 is an opening portion for allowing the game ball entering the out port 58 to pass through to the back side of the game board 11 (game board 11ab).
The various pilot holes are non-through holes that do not penetrate the game board 11ab (they penetrate the cell sheet 11b but do not penetrate the board 11a). Various pilot holes serve as marks for arranging nails and windmills W.

In the manufacturing process of the game board 11, next, a nail driver is used to arrange nails and pinwheels W in pilot holes provided on the front surface (front surface) of the game board 11ab.
In the manufacturing process of the game board 11, next, various components (left structure B1, right structure B2, upper structure B3, lower structure B4, (4th symbol display device 61, other prize winning structure B5, starting structure B6, compound winning device 70, inner rail 12, rail base 13, outer rail 14, etc.) are attached.
As described above, the game board 11 is manufactured.

(Suppression of peeling of cell sheet 11b from game board 11ab)
Next, suppression of peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab will be described.
As described above, in the game board 11ab, various openings (specifically, the opening PH1 for the image display device 31, the opening for the fourth symbol display device 61, and Part PH2, openings PH3 to PH6 for other winning ports 55a to 55e, opening PH7 for composite winning device 70, opening PH8 for first start port 51, opening PH9 for out port 58, screw for An opening (not shown), etc.) is provided.
Here, when an opening is provided in the game area 30, repeated contact of game balls occurs at the periphery of the opening in the cell sheet 11b (hereinafter referred to as "opening edge"), thereby causing the game board 11ab ( Peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the substrate 11a) may occur.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, 95% or more of all the opening edges (specifically, the openings PH1 to PH9) provided in the game area 30 are covered with the back surfaces of various constituent members. It is configured as Here, "coating" refers to a state in which the rear surface of the component is in contact with and covers the edge of the opening (covered). As a result, the edge of the opening is pressed by the back surface (rear surface) of the constituent member, making it possible to suppress peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the portion of the opening edge provided in the game area 30 that is not covered by the rear surface (rear surface) of the constituent members is configured so that the game ball cannot come into contact with it, or The weight of the game ball prevents the cell sheet 11b from being rolled up.
Hereinafter, a configuration for suppressing peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab implemented in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

The opening PH1 is provided substantially in the center of the game board 11ab as viewed from the front. In the game board 11ab, the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 is covered with a plurality of constituent members. Specifically, the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 is covered with the left structure B1, the right structure B2, the upper structure B3, the lower structure B4, and the composite winning device 70. . It should be noted that the entire opening edge of the opening PH1 may be covered with one component.
The left structure B1, the right structure B2, the upper structure B3, the lower structure B4, and the composite winning device 70 are components that guide the game ball so as not to enter the opening PH1. In particular, the left structure B1, the right structure B2, the upper structure B3, and the lower structure B4 are structures forming passages (paths) through which game balls flow down (pass). The left structure B1, the right structure B2, the upper structure B3, and the lower structure B4 are each made of resin.
Specifically, the left structure B1 includes a rear plate b1 and a member (not shown) that constitutes an upstream portion of a left path formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear plate b1. .
The right structure B2 includes a back plate b2 and a member (not shown) forming an upstream portion of a right path formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back plate b2.
The upper structure B3 includes a rear plate b3 and a member (not shown) that forms a guide passage r2 formed in the front (front) of the rear side b3. The guiding path r2 guides the game ball shot from the shooting path r1 to the right side path.
The lower structure B4 includes a rear plate b4 and a member (not shown) forming a warp path r3 formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear plate b4. The warp path r3 includes a ball entrance 56a into which a game ball flowing down the left path can enter, and a first start opening 51 after the game ball entered from the ball entrance 56a rolls (swings). and a rolling stage 56b that discharges upward.
The composite winning device 70 includes a back plate (not shown), a downstream portion of the right path configured on the front (front) of the back plate, and various ball entrances (specifically, the big winning mouth 53, the second 2 starting port 52, operation port 54, and members (not shown) that constitute the other prize winning port 55f). The back plate of the composite winning device 70 is made of resin.

The left structure B1, the right structure B2, the upper structure B3, the lower structure B4, and the composite winning device 70 are designed to prevent the game ball from contacting the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1. It covers the opening edge (front end).
That is, the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 is substantially entirely composed of the rear plate b1 of the left structure B1, the rear plate b2 of the right structure B2, the rear plate b3 of the upper structure B3, and the lower structure. It is covered with the back plate b4 of the body B4 and the back plate of the composite winning device 70.
As a result, among the opening edge of the opening PH1, the rear plate b1 of the left structure B1, the rear plate b2 of the right structure B2, the rear plate b3 of the upper structure B3, the rear plate b4 of the lower structure B4, and It is possible to prevent the part covered by the back plate of the composite winning device 70 from peeling off from the substrate 11a.
Here, as shown in FIG. 16, the rear plate b1 of the left structural body B1 and the rear plate b3 of the upper structural body B3 are arranged at predetermined intervals. That is, the rear plate b1 of the left structure B1 and the rear plate b3 of the upper structure B3 are arranged with a gap G1 interposed therebetween. As a result, the portion of the opening edge of the opening PH1 corresponding to the gap G1 is not covered with the constituent member and is exposed. The gap G1 has a structure in which a game ball can flow down and pass through the front side of the gap G1 (a structure in which the game ball can reach the front side of the gap G1).
However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls flowing down the game area 30 cannot contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 through the gap G1. That is, the dimension (interval) of the gap G1 is designed so that the game ball cannot contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 in the gap G1. Specifically, the interval (dimension) of the gap G1 is set to be less than the diameter of the game ball. In particular, the interval (dimension) of the gap G1 is set to be equal to or less than the diameter of the trunk portion (shaft portion) of the nail. As a result, deformation due to thermal expansion of the left structure B1 and the upper structure B3 can be absorbed by the gap G1. It is possible to suppress peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab caused by the above.
In addition, in this embodiment, the route along which the game ball flows down is configured by various structural members such as nails so that the game ball does not reach the gap G1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17, the rear plate b3 of the upper structure B3 and the rear plate b2 of the right structure B2 are arranged at a predetermined interval. That is, the rear plate b3 of the upper structure B3 and the rear plate b2 of the right structure B2 are arranged with a gap G2 interposed therebetween. As a result, of the opening edge of the opening PH1, the portion corresponding to the gap G2 is not covered with the constituent member and is exposed. The gap G2 has a structure in which a game ball can flow down and pass through the front side of the gap G2 (a structure in which the game ball can reach the front side of the gap G2).
However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls flowing down the game area 30 cannot contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 through the gap G2. That is, the dimension (interval) of the gap G2 is designed so that the game ball cannot contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 in the gap G2. Specifically, the interval (dimension) of the gap G2 is set to be less than the diameter of the game ball. In particular, the interval (dimension) of the gap G2 is set to be equal to or less than the diameter of the trunk portion (shaft portion) of the nail. As a result, deformation due to thermal expansion of the upper structure B3 and the right structure B2 can be absorbed by the gap G2. It is possible to suppress peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab caused by the above.
In addition, in this embodiment, the route along which the game ball flows down is configured by various structural members such as nails so that the game ball does not reach the gap G2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the rear plate b2 of the right structure B2 and the rear plate of the composite winning device 70 are arranged at predetermined intervals. That is, the rear plate b2 of the right structure B2 and the rear plate of the composite winning device 70 are arranged with a gap G3 interposed therebetween. As a result, of the opening edge of the opening PH1, the portion corresponding to the gap G3 is not covered with the constituent members and is exposed. The gap G3 has a structure in which a game ball can flow down and pass through the front side of the gap G3 (a structure in which the game ball can reach the front side of the gap G3).
However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls flowing down the game area 30 cannot contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 through the gap G3. That is, the dimension (interval) of the gap G3 is designed so that the game ball cannot contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 in the gap G3. Specifically, the interval (dimension) of the gap G3 is set to be less than the diameter of the game ball. In particular, the interval (dimension) of the gap G3 is set to be equal to or less than the diameter of the trunk portion (shaft portion) of the nail. As a result, deformation due to thermal expansion of the right structure B2 and the composite winning device 70 can be absorbed by the gap G3, and the portion of the opening edge of the opening PH1 corresponding to the gap G3 is prevented from contacting the game ball. It is possible to suppress peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab caused by the above.
In addition, in this embodiment, the route along which the game ball flows down is configured by various structural members such as nails so that the game ball does not reach the gap G3.

Further, the rear plate b2 of the lower structure B4 and the rear plate of the composite winning device 70 are arranged at predetermined intervals. That is, the back plate b4 of the lower structure B4 and the back plate of the composite winning device 70 are arranged with a predetermined gap (not shown) therebetween. As a result, the portion of the opening edge of the opening PH1 corresponding to the predetermined gap is exposed without being covered by the constituent member. However, the predetermined gap has a structure in which the game ball does not flow down or pass through the front side of the predetermined gap (a structure in which the game ball does not reach the front side of the predetermined gap). This makes it impossible for the game ball to contact the opening edge of the opening PH1 in the predetermined gap.
Similarly, the rear plate b1 of the left structure B1 and the rear plate b4 of the lower structure B4 are arranged at predetermined intervals. That is, the rear plate b1 of the left structure B1 and the rear plate b4 of the lower structure B4 are arranged with a predetermined gap (not shown) therebetween. As a result, the portion of the opening edge of the opening PH1 corresponding to the predetermined gap is exposed without being covered by the constituent members. However, the predetermined gap has a structure in which the game ball does not flow down or pass through the front side of the predetermined gap (a structure in which the game ball does not reach the front side of the predetermined gap). This makes it impossible for the game ball to contact the opening edge of the opening PH1 in the predetermined gap.
As described above, substantially the entire opening edge (front end) of the opening PH1 is covered with a plurality of constituent members. In particular, the portion of the opening edge of the opening PH1 that is not covered by the constituent members is designed so that the game ball cannot come into contact with it. As a result, the entire opening edge of the opening PH1 is configured so that the game ball cannot come into contact with it, and it is possible to suppress the separation of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab.

The fourth symbol display device 61 covers the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH2 so that the game ball does not contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH2.
That is, the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH2 is entirely covered with the back plate of the fourth pattern display device 61 . As a result, the entire opening edge of the opening PH2 is configured so that the game ball cannot come into contact with it, and it is possible to suppress the separation of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab.
The fourth pattern display device 61 includes a back plate (not shown) and a variable display device (dot matrix LED, color bar (full color LED), etc.) arranged on the front side of the back plate. ing. The back plate of the fourth pattern display device 61 is made of resin. The fourth symbol display device 61 can configure a second effect symbol display area a4 (not shown) in which a second effect symbol z2 (not shown) is displayed by a variable display device.

The other winning opening structure B5 covers part of the opening edges (front ends) of the openings PH3 to PH6 so that the game balls do not contact the opening edges (front ends) of the openings PH3 to PH6.
That is, the opening edge (front end) of each of the openings PH3 to PH6 is partially covered with the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5.
The other winning opening structure B5 is made of resin. As shown in FIG. 20, the other prize-winning structure B5 includes a back plate b5 and five ball entry portions 57a to 57e formed on the front side of the back plate b5. Each ball entry portion 57a to 57e is formed in a cup shape (concave shape) that opens upward (including obliquely upward). Each ball entry portion 57a to 57e has an opening (ball entry port) (not shown) into which game balls enter. Each of the ball entry portions 57a to 57e can receive game balls flowing downward (including obliquely downward) through the openings. Here, game balls flowing down the left path can be entered into the respective ball entry portions 57a to 57e.
The entering ball portion 57a guides the entering game ball to flow into the opening portion PH3. That is, the game ball entering the ball entering portion 57a passes through the opening PH3 and is guided to the back side (rear side) of the game board 11. As shown in FIG.
The entering ball portion 57b guides the entering game ball to flow into the opening portion PH4. That is, the game ball entering the ball entering portion 57b passes through the opening PH4 and is guided to the back side (rear side) of the game board 11. As shown in FIG.
The entering ball portion 57c guides the entering game ball to flow into the opening portion PH4. That is, the game ball entering the ball entering portion 57c passes through the opening PH4 and is guided to the back side (rear side) of the game board 11. As shown in FIG.
The entering ball portion 57d guides the entering game ball to flow into the opening portion PH5. That is, the game ball entering the ball entering portion 57d passes through the opening PH5 and is guided to the back side (rear side) of the game board 11. As shown in FIG.
The entering ball portion 57e guides the entering game ball to flow into the opening portion PH6. That is, the game ball entering the ball entering portion 57e passes through the opening PH6 and is guided to the back side (rear side) of the game board 11. As shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, at each of the openings PH3, PH5, and PH6, a covering portion (not shown) covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5 and another winning opening structure A non-covered portion (exposed portion) NC that is not covered by the back plate b5 of the body B5 is provided. At this time, the non-coated portion NC is set to a portion (predetermined range) corresponding to the opening (entrance opening) of each ball entrance portion 57a, 57d, 57e among the opening edges of each of the opening portions PH3, PH5, and PH6. ing. That is, the non-coated portion NC is set in a predetermined upper portion (predetermined range) of the opening edges of the openings PH3, PH5, and PH6. In other words, the non-coated portion NC is set at a predetermined upper portion of the opening edges of each of the openings PH3, PH5, and PH6. In particular, the non-coated portion NC is set in a predetermined portion (predetermined range) including the vertices of the opening edges of the openings PH3, PH5, and PH6. On the other hand, all of the opening edges of the openings PH3, PH5, and PH6 except for the non-covered portion NC are covered portions. In other words, the covering portion is set at a predetermined lower portion of the opening edge of each of the openings PH3, PH5, and PH6. As a result, of the opening edges (front ends) of the openings PH3, PH5, and PH6, portions corresponding to the openings (entrance openings) of the respective ball entrance portions 57a, 57d, and 57e are aligned with the back of the other winning opening structure B5. Other portions that are not covered with the face plate b5 are covered with the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5. In particular, of the opening edges of the openings PH3, PH5, and PH6, an upper predetermined portion (uncovered portion NC) is not covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5, and the other portion (covered part) is covered with the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening PH4 is covered by a covering portion (not shown) covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5 and the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5. A non-covered portion (exposed portion) NC is provided. At this time, the non-coated portion NC is set in a portion (predetermined range) corresponding to the opening (entrance) of the opening edge of the opening PH4. That is, the non-coated portion NC is set in a predetermined upper portion (predetermined range) of the opening edge of the opening PH4. Here, the opening PH4 is an opening corresponding to the winning ball portion 57b (opening constituting the other winning opening 55b) and an opening corresponding to the winning ball portion 57c (another winning opening) by the other winning opening structure B5. The opening forming the mouth 55c) and . The uncovered portion NC includes an opening corresponding to the ball-entering portion 57b (an opening constituting the other winning opening 55b) and an opening corresponding to the ball-entering portion 57c (an opening constituting the other winning opening 55c). ), it is set to a predetermined portion (predetermined range) including the vertex of the opening edge of the opening. On the other hand, all of the opening edge of the opening PH4 except for the non-covered portion NC is covered. As a result, of the opening edge (front end) of the opening portion PH4, the portions corresponding to the openings (entrance openings) of the respective ball entry portions 57b and 57c are covered with the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5. However, the other part is covered with the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5. In particular, of the opening edge of the opening PH4, an upper predetermined portion (uncovered portion NC) is not covered by the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5, and the other portion (covered portion) is It is covered with the back plate b5 of the prize winning structure B5.

As described above, with respect to the opening edges (front ends) of the openings PH3 to PH6, portions corresponding to the openings (entrance openings) of the ball entry portions 57a to 57e (predetermined upper portions) are the other winning opening structure B5. The non-covered portion NC is exposed so that the game ball can contact it, and the other portion is covered with the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5. It is a covering portion that cannot be contacted by a game ball.
Here, when only suppressing peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab is considered, the entire opening edge (front end) of each of the openings PH3 to PH6 is placed on the back of the other winning opening structure B5. It is preferable to set it as the structure covered with the face plate b5. However, if the opening edges (front ends) of the openings PH3 to PH6 are entirely covered with the back plate b5 of the other winning opening structure B5, the configuration of the other winning opening structure B5 becomes complicated. The amount of material (resin in this embodiment) required for constructing the other winning opening structure B5 increases, and the manufacturing cost increases.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a predetermined portion (uncovered portion NC) of the opening edge (front end) of each of the openings PH3 to PH6 is not covered with the other prize winning opening structure B5. As a result, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the other winning opening structure B5, reduce the amount of materials required for constructing the other winning opening structure B5, and reduce the manufacturing cost. Become.
Here, if a predetermined portion (non-covered portion NC) of the opening edges of each of the openings PH3 to PH6 is not covered by the other winning opening structure B5, the predetermined portion (non- At the covering portion NC), the cell sheet 11b may be peeled off due to the contact of the game ball.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, of the opening edges (front ends) of the openings PH3 to PH6, portions corresponding to the openings (entrance openings) of the ball entry portions 57a to 57e are provided with the uncovered portions NC. . Accordingly, since the peripheral edge of the cell sheet 11b extends downward in the non-coated portion NC, the peripheral edge of the cell sheet 11b is curled upward when peeling of the cell sheet 11b occurs. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, each ball entry part 57a to 57e configured in the other winning hole structure B5 is opened upward to receive the game ball flowing down (falling) downward. and As a result, the peripheral edge (front end) of the cell sheet 11b about to roll up in the non-coated portion NC is pressed by the weight of the game ball flowing into each of the ball-entering portions 57a to 57e, so that the cell sheet 11b is peeled off. can be suppressed.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the uncovered portion NC is provided in the upper portion (especially, a predetermined range including the vertex of the opening edge) of the opening edges (front ends) of the openings PH3 to PH6. Accordingly, since the peripheral edge of the cell sheet 11b extends downward in the non-coated portion NC, the peripheral edge of the cell sheet 11b is curled upward when peeling of the cell sheet 11b occurs. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the openings (entrance openings) of the respective ball entry portions 57a to 57e configured in the other winning opening structure B5 are opened upward and flow down (falling) downward. ) is configured to accept game balls. As a result, the peeling of the cell sheet 11b can be suppressed by pressing the peripheral edge of the sheet material that is about to roll up in the non-coated portion NC by the weight of the game ball flowing into each of the stables 57a to 57e. It becomes possible.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost while preventing the cell sheet 11b from peeling off the game board 11ab.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the entire opening edges (front ends) of the openings PH3 to PH6 are covered by the front plate (not shown) of the other winning opening structure B5 when viewed from the front.
As a result, even if the cell sheet 11b is peeled off at the upper portions of the opening edges of the openings PH3 to PH6, it is possible to prevent the appearance from being spoiled.
In addition, when viewed from the front, the upper portions of the opening edges of the openings PH3 to PH6 may not be covered by the front plate of the other winning opening structure B5.

The composite winning device 70 covers the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH7 so that the game ball does not come into contact with the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH7. That is, the opening edge (front end) of the opening portion PH7 is entirely covered with the back plate of the composite winning device 70 . As a result, the entire opening edge of the opening PH7 is configured so that the game ball cannot come into contact with it, and it is possible to suppress the separation of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab.
The starting opening structure B6 covers the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH8 so that the game ball does not contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH8. That is, the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH8 is entirely covered with the back plate 51a of the starting opening structure B6. As a result, the entire opening edge of the opening PH8 is configured so that the game ball cannot come into contact with it, and it is possible to suppress the separation of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab.
The starting port structure B6 is made of resin. As shown in FIG. 19, the starting opening structure B6 includes a back plate 51a and a ball entry portion 51b formed on the front side of the back plate 51a. The ball entry portion 51b is formed in a cup shape (concave shape) that opens upward. The ball entry portion 51b can receive a game ball that flows downward. Here, a game ball flowing down the left path can be entered into the ball entry portion 51b. The entering ball portion 51b guides the entering game ball to flow into the opening portion PH8. That is, the game ball entering the ball entering portion 51b passes through the opening PH8 and is guided to the back side of the game board 11. As shown in FIG.

The starting opening structure B6 and the inner rail 12 guide the game ball to flow into the opening PH9. The starting opening structure B6 and the inner rail 12 cover the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH9 so that the game ball does not contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH9. That is, the opening edge of the opening PH9 is covered with a plurality of constituent members. Specifically, the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH9 is substantially entirely covered with the back plate 51a of the starting opening structure B6 and the inner rail 12 . As a result, the portion of the opening edge of the opening PH9 covered by the back plate 51a and the inner rail 12 of the starting opening structure B6 is configured so that the game ball cannot come into contact with it, and the game board 11ab It becomes possible to suppress peeling of the cell sheet 11b.
Here, as shown in FIG. 19, the back plate 51a and the inner rail 12 of the starting opening structure B6 are arranged at a predetermined interval. That is, the back plate 51a and the inner rail 12 of the starting opening structure B6 are arranged with two gaps G4 interposed therebetween. As a result, portions of the opening edge of the opening PH9 corresponding to the gaps G4 are not covered with the constituent members and are exposed. Each gap G4 has a structure in which a game ball can flow down and pass through the front side of the gap G4 (a structure in which the game ball can reach the front side of the gap G4).
However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls flowing down the game area 30 cannot contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH9 through each gap G4. That is, the dimension (interval) of each gap G4 is designed so that the game ball cannot contact the opening edge (front end) of the opening PH9 in each gap G4. Specifically, the interval (dimension) of each gap G4 is set to be less than the diameter of the game ball. In particular, the interval (dimension) of each gap G4 is set to be equal to or less than the diameter of the trunk portion (shaft portion) of the nail. As a result, deformation due to thermal expansion of the starter opening structure B6 and the inner rail 12 can be absorbed by the gaps G4, and the portions of the opening edge of the opening PH9 that correspond to the gaps G4 are removed from the game balls. It is possible to suppress the peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab due to the contact.
As described above, substantially the entire opening edge (front end) of the opening PH9 is covered with a plurality of constituent members. In particular, the portion of the opening edge of the opening PH9 that is not covered by the constituent members is designed so that the game ball cannot come into contact with it. As a result, the entire opening edge of the opening PH9 is configured so that the game ball cannot come into contact with it, and it is possible to suppress the separation of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab.
Here, nails and pinwheels W are arranged at the opening edge (front end) of each prepared hole in the cell sheet 11b so that the game ball cannot contact the opening edge (front end). . Further, the opening edge of the opening for the screw in the cell sheet 11b is configured so that the game ball cannot come into contact with the opening edge by screwing the screw.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to suppress peeling of the cell sheet 11b from the game board 11ab.

(Regarding inner rail 12 and outer rail 14)
Next, the inner rail 12 and the outer rail 14 will be described.
FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the game board. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the configuration of the outer rail. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the arrangement of guide holes gh in the outer rail. FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view of the rail base.
23(a) shows the outer rail 14 as seen from the side, and FIG. 23(b) shows the outer rail 14 as seen from the front. 24 shows the state of the outer rail 14 attached to the game board 11 viewed from the front side. Also, in FIG. 25, the game ball is indicated by the code "B".
An inner rail 12, a rail base 13, and an outer rail 14 are attached to the front of the game board 11 (board 11a). A game area 30 is defined by the inner rail 12, the outer rail 14, and the like.
The inner rail 12 is made of resin or the like. The inner rail 12 is configured in an arc shape when viewed from the front side. The outer peripheral surface of the inner rail 12 constitutes an inner guide surface 12a that guides the game ball. A return ball prevention piece 12b is provided at the tip of the inner rail 12. As shown in FIG. The return ball prevention piece 12b prevents the game ball shot from the shooting path r1 to the game area 30 from returning to the shooting path r1.

The rail base 13 is made of resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 22, the rail base 13 is provided with a guide surface 13b that supports the outer rail 14. As shown in FIG. The guide surface 13b extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
At least a part of the guide surface 13b in the longitudinal direction is inclined toward the rear side (the front side of the game board 11). In this embodiment, substantially the entire length of the guide surface 13b is inclined toward the rear side. As a result, at least a part of the outer guide surface 14c of the outer rail 14 supported by the guide surface 13b (in this embodiment, substantially the entire area) in the longitudinal direction is directed toward the rear side (the front side of the game board 11). Can be tilted. As a result, the game ball shot by the game ball shooting device 430 is less likely to flow toward the front side (the side of the transparent plate g2), making it possible to suppress contact with the transparent plate g2.
A plurality of protrusions (bosses) pr are provided on the guide surface 13b. Each protruding portion pr is formed as a substantially elliptical protruding portion, and is provided so as to protrude from the guide surface 13b. Each projecting portion pr is fitted into a guide hole gh provided in the outer rail 14 to position the outer rail 14 with respect to the rail base 13 (game board 11).
A proximal end support portion (not shown) that supports the proximal bent portion 14 a provided on the outer rail 14 is provided at the proximal end portion (starting end portion) of the rail base 13 . The proximal support portion is configured as a recess into which the proximal bent portion 14a can be inserted. Further, a distal end side support portion (not shown) is provided at the distal end portion (terminal end portion) of the rail base 13 to support the distal end bent portion 14 b provided on the outer rail 14 . The tip-side support portion is configured as a recess into which the tip-side bent portion 14b can be inserted.
Further, the rail base 13 is provided with a covering portion 13a that covers (supports) the side surface (the side surface on the front side) of the outer rail 14 when viewed from the front side.

The outer rail 14 is made of metal. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the outer rail 14 is formed in a flat plate shape and extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
A base end portion (starting end portion) of the outer rail 14 is provided with a base end bent portion 14a. The proximal bent portion 14a is formed by bending the proximal portion of the outer rail 14 into a substantially L shape. A distal end portion (end portion) of the outer rail 14 is provided with a distal end side bent portion 14b. The tip side bent portion 14b is formed by bending the tip portion of the outer rail 14 into a substantially U shape.
A guide surface 13b of the rail base 13 supports the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 formed in an arc shape. The inner peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 formed in an arc shape constitutes an outer guide surface 14c that guides the game ball.
A plurality of guide holes gh are provided in the outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c). Each guide hole gh is a through hole penetrating the outer rail 14 in the thickness direction. Each guide hole gh is a substantially elliptical through hole into which the protrusion pr can be fitted.
In the outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c), when the outer rail 14 is supported (mounted) on the guide surface 13b, guide holes are formed at positions corresponding to the protrusions pr provided on the guide surface 13b. gh is provided. As a result, the guide hole gh and the projection pr guide (define) the mounting position of the outer rail 14 with respect to the rail base 13 (guide surface 13b), and further guide (define) the mounting position of the outer rail 14 with respect to the game board 11. )do.

Next, the arrangement of the guide holes gh in the outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c) will be described.
Here, the arrangement of the plurality of guide holes gh in the outer rail 14 and the arrangement of the plurality of protrusions pr in the guide surface 13b correspond to each other.
Therefore, the arrangement condition of the plurality of guide holes gh in the outer rail 14 and the arrangement condition of the plurality of projections pr in the guide surface 13b are the same.
Therefore, the arrangement condition of the plurality of guide holes gh in the outer rail 14 will be described below, and the explanation of the arrangement condition of the plurality of protrusions pr in the guide surface 13b will be omitted.
The outer rail 14 is attached to the front of the game board 11 via the rail base 13 . The outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c) extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side while attached to the game board 11 .
As shown in FIG. 24, in the following description, when the outer rail 14 attached to the game board 11 is viewed from the front side, the uppermost portion (upper vertex) of the outer rail 14 is referred to as "upper vertex P1 , and the leftmost portion (left vertex) of the outer rail 14 is defined as "left vertex P2".
The range from the base end (starting end) of the outer rail 14 to the left vertex P2 is defined as a "first range H1", the range from the left vertex P2 to the upper vertex P1 of the outer rail 14 is defined as a "second range H2", The range from the upper vertex P1 of the outer rail 14 to the tip (terminus) is defined as "third range H3".
Also, the range from the left vertex P2 of the outer rail 14 to the tip (terminus) is referred to as a "fourth range". That is, the fourth range=second range H2+third range H3.
A range from the base end (starting end) of the outer rail 14 to the upper vertex P1 is defined as a "fifth range". That is, the fifth range=first range H1+second range H2.
Further, the range from the base end (starting end) to the intermediate portion of the outer rail 14 is referred to as "sixth range", and the range from the intermediate portion to the tip (terminating end) of the outer rail 14 is referred to as "seventh range". Here, the “intermediate portion” is a portion in the middle (center) of the outer rail 14 in the longitudinal direction.

In this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is larger than that in the second range H2, and the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2 is larger than that in the third range H3. The number of gh provided is increasing.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2. The number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3, and the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2 is greater. The number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2, and the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is The number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is larger than that in the fourth range.
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the fifth range is larger than that in the third range H3.
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the sixth range is larger than that in the seventh range.

Specifically, three guide holes gh are provided along the longitudinal direction in the first range H1. On the other hand, two guide holes gh are provided in the second range H2 along the longitudinal direction. On the other hand, no guide hole gh is provided in the third range H3.
Thus, the fourth range is provided with two guide holes gh along the longitudinal direction. In addition, five guide holes gh are provided along the longitudinal direction in the fifth range. In addition, four guide holes gh are provided in the sixth range along the longitudinal direction. In addition, one guide hole gh is provided along the longitudinal direction in the seventh range.
That is, in the outer rail 14, the portion on the base end side (game ball launching device 430 side) is more impacted by the collision of the game ball launched by the game ball launching device 430 than the portion on the tip side (terminal side). increases, and the impact on the launching direction of the game ball shot by the game ball shooting device 430 increases.
As a result, in the outer rail 14, the base end side (game ball launching device 430 side) is required to have a higher mounting strength than the tip side (terminal side) part, and more accurate placement is required. requested.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, by increasing the number of guide holes gh provided in the base end side (game ball launching device 430 side) portion of the outer rail 14, positional deviation in the base end portion can be prevented. and vibration can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to stabilize the trajectory of the game ball and execute the game as designed. In particular, it is possible to prevent damage and vibration of the outer rail 14 due to the collision of the shot game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the shot game ball from shaking due to the damage or vibration, and it is possible to send the shot game ball to the board surface of the game board 11 stably. As a result, irregular movements of the game ball are reduced, and the game can be stably executed.
On the other hand, by reducing the number of guide holes gh provided in the front end side (terminating end side) of the outer rail 14, it is possible to facilitate processing of the outer rail 14 and attachment to the rail base 13. It becomes possible.
As described above, it is possible to achieve both prevention of displacement and vibration of the outer rail 14 and facilitation of processing of the outer rail 14 and attachment to the game board 11 .

In particular, in this embodiment, the guide holes gh are not formed at the upper vertex P1 and the left vertex P2 of the outer rail 14 .
That is, when an impact is applied to the upper and lower side surfaces or the left and right side surfaces of the game board 11, the impact is strongly transmitted to the upper vertex P1 or the left vertex P2 of the outer rails . Accordingly, when the guide holes gh are formed at the upper vertex P1 and the left vertex P2 of the outer rail 14, the formation of the guide holes gh reduces the strength of the upper vertex P1 and the left vertex P2. The outer rail 14 may be damaged. Therefore, by forming the guide hole gh while avoiding the upper vertex P1 and the left vertex P2 of the outer rail 14, it is possible to suppress damage to the outer rail 14. FIG.
Further, in the present embodiment, no guide hole gh is formed in the third range H3. This makes it possible to facilitate processing of the outer rail 14 and attachment to the rail base 13 . Note that one or more guide holes gh may be formed in the third range H3.

As described above, in this embodiment, the outer rail 14 is formed with five guide holes gh along the longitudinal direction. At this time, the arrangement intervals of the five guide holes gh are uneven. In particular, the arrangement interval of the five guide holes gh is set so as to be wider toward the tip side (end side). In other words, the arrangement interval of the five guide holes gh is set so as to become narrower toward the proximal end (starting end).
Each guide hole gh is formed at a position where the game ball shot by the game ball shooting device 430 does not contact. That is, as shown in FIG. 25, each guide hole gh is formed at the end of the outer rail 14 in the width direction on the far side (the front side of the game board 11). In particular, each guide hole gh is formed at a position on the inner side (front side of the game board 11) from the position on the front side by the radius of the game ball from the front of the game board 11 in the width direction of the outer rail 14. ing.

Next, a method for attaching each rail 12, 14 to the game board 11 (board 11a) will be described.
In order to attach the inner rail 12 to the game board 11, a positioning convex portion (not shown) provided on the back side of the inner rail 12 is inserted into a positioning concave portion (not shown) provided on the front side of the game board 11. not shown). As a result, the inner rail 12 is arranged at a predetermined position in front of the game board 11 . Then, the inner rail 12 is fixed to the front surface of the game board 11 by screwing.
To attach the outer rail 14 to the game board 11 , first, the rail base 13 is attached to the front surface of the game board 11 . For this purpose, a positioning projection (not shown) provided on the back side of the rail base 13 is inserted into a positioning recess (not shown) provided on the front of the game board 11 . As a result, the rail base 13 is arranged at a predetermined position in front of the game board 11 . Then, the rail base 13 is fixed to the front surface of the game board 11 by screwing.
Next, the outer rail 14 is attached to the rail base 13 . For this, the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 is arranged along the guide surface 13 b of the rail base 13 . In addition, the proximal bent portion 14 a of the outer rail 14 is inserted (fitted) into the proximal support portion of the rail base 13 , and the distal bent portion 14 b of the outer rail 14 is supported on the distal end side of the rail base 13 . Insert (fit) into the part. Further, each protrusion pr provided on the guide surface 13b is inserted (fitted) into each guide hole gh provided on the outer rail 14 . As a result, the outer rail 14 is attached to the rail base 13 in a state in which substantially the entire longitudinal direction of the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 is supported by the guide surface 13b.

A game area 30 is defined in front of the game board 11 by the inner rail 12, the outer rail 14, and the like. In the game area 30, there are a left path (left hitting area) formed on the left side of the image display device 31 and a right path (right hitting area) formed on the right side of the image display device 31 as paths along which game balls flow down. and are configured.
In addition, on the front surface of the game board 11, the inner guide surface 12a of the inner rail 12 and the outer guide surface 14c of the outer rail 14 are arranged facing each other at a predetermined interval. A shooting path r1 for guiding the game ball shot by the game ball shooting device 430 to the game area 30 is formed between the inner guide surface 12a and the outer guide surface 14c.
Further, in the game area 30, a guiding path r2 is formed to guide (guide) the game ball shot from the shooting path r1 to the right side path. The guide passage r2 is formed at the upper end of the game area 30. As shown in FIG. The guide passage r2 is formed above the image display device 31 . The guide passage r2 extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
In this embodiment, the outer guide surface 14c constitutes the outer peripheral surface ra of the guide passage r2. A decorative portion 33 is provided above the opening in the front of the game board 11 . An inner peripheral surface rb of the guide passage r2 is formed on the upper surface of the decorative portion 33. As shown in FIG.
The game ball shot by the game ball shooting device 430 passes through the shooting path r1 and flows into the game area 30. - 特許庁At this time, when the momentum of the shot game ball is weak, the game ball that has passed through the shooting path r1 flows into the left path. On the other hand, when the momentum of the shot game ball is strong, the game ball that has passed through the shooting path r1 passes through the guiding path r2 and flows into the right path.

(Regarding the positional relationship between the design portion 40 and the guide passage r2)
Next, the positional relationship between the design portion 40 and the guide passage r2 will be described.
26 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 27 is an enlarged view of FIG. 26. FIG. In addition, in FIG.26 and FIG.27, the code|symbol "B" shows the game ball.
As shown in FIG. 26 , a design portion 40 is provided at the upper end portion of the front frame unit 4 . The design portion 40 is provided so as to surround the transparent plates g1 and g2 when viewed from the front side. The design portion 40 is provided so as to bulge (protrude) from the front of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) toward the front side. In particular, the design portion 40 is provided so as to bulge (protrude) toward the front side with respect to the transparent plates g1 and g2.
Specifically, the design portion 40 includes an upper surface 41 extending from the front surface of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) toward the front side, and a front surface 42 extending downward from the front end portion (front end portion) of the upper surface 41 . and a lower surface 43 extending from the lower end of the front surface 42 toward the back surface. As a result, the design portion 40 has a substantially U-shaped cross section.
The rear end (rear end) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 extends to the front of the transparent plate g1. In this embodiment, the rear-side end of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is in contact with the front surface of the transparent plate g1.
In particular, the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is inclined in the depth direction so that the front side is lower and the rear side is higher. As a result, a part of the upper end of the game board 11 is covered (concealed) by the lower end of the design portion 40 when viewed from the front side.
In addition, the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is curved such that each end in the left-right direction is low and the central portion in the left-right direction is high.

In the following description, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, a portion (hereinafter referred to as " An imaginary line passing through the apex of the periphery) is defined as a "first reference line k1". In addition, in this embodiment, the outer peripheral vertex coincides with the upper vertex P1.
Further, an imaginary line that extends along the vertical direction, intersects the first reference line k1, and intersects the back side end (rear end) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is defined as the "first vertical line ” (not shown). A portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects the first vertical line is defined as a "first design portion d1".
Further, an imaginary line that extends along the vertical direction, intersects the first reference line k1, and intersects the lowest portion (lowest portion) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is defined as the "second vertical line” (not shown). A portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects the second vertical line is defined as a "second design portion d2".
An imaginary line that is orthogonal to the front surface of the game board 11 and passes through a portion of the inner peripheral surface rb of the guide path r2 that is located directly below the outer peripheral vertex is defined as a "second reference line k2". That is, the second reference line k2 is parallel to the first reference line k1 directly below the first reference line k1.
As a result, an imaginary line that extends in the vertical direction, intersects the second reference line k2, and intersects the back side end (rear end) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is the above-described second reference line. 1 coincides with the plumb line. As described above, the portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects the first vertical line is the first design portion d1.
In addition, the virtual line that extends along the vertical direction, intersects the second reference line k2, and intersects the lowermost portion (lowest portion) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is the above-mentioned Coincides with the second plumb line. As described above, the portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects the second vertical line is the second design portion d2.

In this embodiment, the first design portion d1 is arranged below (lower than) the first reference line k1. In particular, the distance (dimension) A from the first reference line k1 to the first design portion d1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball (4 [mm] in this embodiment). Here, the distance A is the height difference between the position of the first reference line k1 and the position of the first design portion d1.
Further, in the present embodiment, the second design portion d2 is arranged below (lower than) the first reference line k1. In particular, the distance (dimension) B from the first reference line k1 to the second design portion d2 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball (40 [mm] in this embodiment). Here, the distance B is the height difference between the position of the first reference line k1 and the position of the second design portion d2.
Thus, in the present embodiment, the second design portion d2 is arranged below (lower position) than the first reference line k1, and in particular, the distance B from the first reference line k1 to the second design portion d2 is By setting the diameter to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, it is possible to increase the size of the design portion 40 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, by setting the distance A from the first reference line k1 to the first design portion d1 to be equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball is strongly shot by the game ball launching device 430, and the game ball travels along the guide path r2. When rolling along the outer peripheral surface ra, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the game ball from the front side. As described above, since the pachinko machine 1 ensures the visibility of the game balls, the player is prevented from overlooking the game balls, and the game can be played normally. As a result, the game can be played stably.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first design portion d1 is arranged above (higher than) the second reference line k2. In particular, the distance (dimension) C from the second reference line k2 to the first design portion d1 is greater than or equal to the radius of the game ball (14 [mm] in this embodiment). Here, the distance C is the height difference between the position of the second reference line k2 and the position of the first design portion d1.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the second design portion d2 is arranged below (lower than) the second reference line k2. In particular, the distance (dimension) D from the second reference line k2 to the second design portion d2 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball (22 [mm] in this embodiment). Here, the distance D is the height difference between the position of the second reference line k2 and the position of the second design portion d2.
Thus, in this embodiment, the second design portion d2 is arranged below (lower position) than the second reference line k2, and in particular, the distance D from the second reference line k2 to the second design portion d2 By setting the diameter to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, it is possible to increase the size of the design portion 40 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, by setting the distance C from the second reference line k2 to the first design portion d1 to be equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball, the game ball is weakly launched by the game ball launching device 430, and the game ball travels along the guide path r2. When rolling along the inner peripheral surface rb, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the game ball from the front side. As described above, since the pachinko machine 1 ensures the visibility of the game balls, the player is prevented from overlooking the game balls, and the game can be played normally. As a result, the game can be played stably.

(Regarding board surface lamp 21 and image display device 31)
A board lamp 21 (see FIG. 28) is arranged in the game area 30 of the game board 11 . The board lamp 21 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.
The image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set plate. The image display device 31 is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display.
The image display device 31 includes a display screen 31a capable of displaying various effects images (moving images and still images).
On the display screen 31a, it is possible to configure three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 (not shown) in which the first effect symbol z1 (not shown) is displayed. Further, as described above, the fourth design display device 61 can configure the second performance symbol display area a4 (not shown) in which the second performance symbol z2 (not shown) is displayed. ing.
The first production pattern z1 includes identification information (symbols) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters. In each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the first effect symbol z1.
The second effect pattern z2 is composed of a color bar. In the second effect symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the second effect symbol z2.

The variable display of the production designs z1 and z2 means that the first production design z1 is moved (scrolled) in each of the first production design display areas a1 to a3, and the second production design displayed in the second production design display area a4. 2 Refers to a display in which the type of effect pattern z2 is changed (the color represented by the color bar is sequentially changed).
The stop display of the production patterns z1 and z2 means that the first production pattern z1 of one type is stopped at the lottery result display position of each of the first production design display areas a1 to a3, and the second production design display area a4. , a display in which one type of second effect pattern z2 is displayed (a color bar represents a predetermined color).
Then, a combination of the first production pattern z1 stop-displayed in the three first production pattern display areas a1 to a3 and the second production pattern z2 stop-displayed in the second production design display area a4 produces a special design. The result of the lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is displayed.
Further, the display screen 31a can be configured with reserved pattern display areas b1 and b2 (not shown) in which reserved patterns h (not shown) are displayed.
In the pending symbol display area b1, the pending symbol h corresponding to the game information during the notification display (variation display and stop display of special symbols) is displayed. In the reserved symbol display area b2, a reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information whose notification display is being reserved is displayed.

(Configuration of game area 30)
Next, the configuration of the game area 30 will be described.
A first start port 51 is provided below the display screen 31 a in the game area 30 . The first starting port 51 is a ball-entering port (so-called “navel”) that opens upward, and is always capable of entering a game ball. The first starting port 51 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
In the first start port 51, a special figure 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 28) is arranged. The special figure 1 starting port switch 101 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball entered into the first starting port 51 (entering the game ball into the first starting port 51) Output. The main control board 200 executes the first special symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 .

Other winning openings 55a to 55e are provided to the left of the first starting opening 51 in the game area 30. As shown in FIG. Each of the other prize winning openings 55a to 55e is a ball entrance opened upward (or obliquely upward), and game balls can be entered at all times. Each of the other prize-winning openings 55a to 55e is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
The game board 11 is provided with another winning port switch 106 (see FIG. 28). The other winning opening switch 106 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the other winning openings 55a to 55f (entering the game ball to the other winning openings 55a to 55f). Output. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the other winning port switch 106 .

A composite winning device 70 is provided on the right side of the display screen 31 a in the game area 30 . A downstream portion of the right path is configured in the composite winning device 70 .
As shown in FIG. 21 , a large winning opening 53 is provided at the most upstream position in the composite winning device 70 . The big winning hole 53 has a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the big winning hole 53, and a closed state that makes it possible (or easy) for a game ball to enter the big winning hole 53. A special electric accessory (special electric role) 53a is provided that can be displaced to an open state to be set.
The special electric accessory 53a is opened and closed by a special electric accessory solenoid 65 (see FIG. 28). Normally, the special electric accessory 53a is in a closed state and the game ball cannot be entered into the big winning opening 53. When a "small win" or "big win" is won by a lottery, the special electric accessary 53a is opened and a game ball can be entered. The big winning opening 53 allows entry of game balls flowing down the right path (impossibility of entry of game balls flowing down the left path).
A count switch 103 (see FIG. 28) is arranged in the big winning opening 53 . The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the big winning hole 53 (entering the game ball into the big winning hole 53). The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the count switch 103 .

In addition, inside the big winning opening 53, there are a V area (not shown), a discharge area (not shown), and a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 53 in one of the V area and the discharging area. A sorting means (not shown) for sorting to the area of is provided.
A V-region switch 110 (see FIG. 28) is arranged in the V-region. The V area switch 110 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the V area (passage of the game ball through the V area). Triggered by the input of the detection signal from the V area switch 110, the main control board 200 sets "1" in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, which will be described later.
The distributing means is displaced between a V passing state in which game balls entered into the big winning opening 53 are distributed to V areas and a non-V passing state in which game balls entering the big winning opening 53 are distributed to discharge areas. It is possible to
That is, when the sorting means is displaced to the V passage state, all the game balls entering the big winning hole 53 are sorted to the V area. This makes it impossible for a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 53 to pass through the ejection area.
On the other hand, when the sorting means is displaced to the non-V passing state, all the game balls entering the big winning opening 53 are sorted to the discharge area. This makes it impossible for a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 53 to pass through the V area.
The diverting means is displaced by a V-region solenoid 66 (see FIG. 28).
A game ball entering the big winning hole 53 is first detected by the count switch 103, then distributed to one of the V region and the discharge region by the distribution means, and after passing through the region , is discharged to the discharge path. At this time, the game balls distributed to the V area are detected by the V area switch 110 .

A second starting port 52 is provided downstream of the big winning port 53 in the composite winning device 70 . The second starting port 52 has a closed state that makes it impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 52, and an open state that allows a game ball to enter the second starting port 52. A displaceable ordinary electric accessory (ordinary electric accessory) 52a (so-called “electric tulip”) is provided.
The normal electric accessory 52a is opened and closed by a normal electric accessory solenoid 64 (see FIG. 28). In the second starting port 52, the normal electric accessory 52a is normally in a closed state, making it impossible to enter the game ball. 52a is opened, and a game ball can be entered. The second starting port 52 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
Inside the second starting port 52, a special figure 2 starting port switch 102 (see FIG. 28) is arranged. The special figure 2 starting port switch 102 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that entered the second starting port 52 (entering the game ball to the second starting port 52) Output. The main control board 200 executes the second special symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 .

An operation port 54 is provided downstream of the second starting port 52 in the composite winning device 70 . The operating port 54 is a ball-entering port that opens upward, and game balls can be entered at all times. The operation port 54 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
An actuation port switch 104 (see FIG. 28) is disposed within the actuation port 54 . The operation port switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the operation port 54 (entering the game ball into the operation port 54). The main control board 200 executes normal symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the operation port switch 104 .

A second winning opening 55f is provided on the side of the second starting opening 52 in the composite winning device 70. As shown in FIG. As described above, the game ball entering the other winning opening 55f is detected by the other winning opening switch 106. FIG.
At the lowest position in the game area 30, an out port 58 is provided for discharging game balls that have not entered (won a prize) in any of the winning ports 51 to 54 and 55a to 55f.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which game balls discharged from the game area 30 pass. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3 . The pachinko machine 1 is configured such that all game balls hit into the game area 30 (all game balls discharged from the game area 30) pass through the discharge path. That is, the game ball launched into the game area 30 is discharged from the game area 30 by entering one of the winning openings 51 to 54, 55a to 55e, or by passing through the out opening 58, flow into the discharge channel.
Specifically, the game balls entered into the winning holes 51 to 54 and 55a to 55f are guided to the discharge path after being detected by the switches 101 to 103 and 106 provided in the winning holes. Also, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 is guided to the discharge path.
The inner frame unit 3 is provided with an out switch 109 (see FIG. 28). Then, the out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the discharge path (a game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all game balls ejected from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109 .
Furthermore, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game balls to the winning openings 51 to 54 and 55a to 55f.

A main display device 60 is arranged on the game board 11 . The main display device 60 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light-emitting element (LED in this embodiment).
Information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60 .
The main display device 60 includes a special figure 1 display device, a special figure 2 display device, a normal figure display device, a special figure 1 reservation display device, a special figure 2 reservation display device, a general figure reservation display device, and a round It is configured including a display device, a right-handed display device, and a time saving display device.
Specifically, the main display device 60 includes 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32).
And, in the main display device 60, LED1 ~ LED8 constitutes a special figure 1 display device, LED7 ~ LED16 constitutes a special figure 2 display device, LED17, 18 constitutes a general figure display device, LED19 ~LED23 constitutes a round display device, LED24 constitutes a right-handed display device, LED25, 26 constitutes a special figure 1 pending display device, LEDs 27, 28 constitutes a special figure 2 pending display device Then, the LEDs 29 and 30 constitute a normal drawing holding display device, and the LED 32 constitutes a time saving display device. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the LED 31 is not used.

The special figure 1 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 1 display device, the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed by the stopped and displayed first special symbol.
The special figure 2 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the second special pattern consisting of numbers, patterns, and the like. Then, in the special figure 2 display device, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by the stopped and displayed second special symbol.
Here, the display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the special symbol display device and the display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4 are the times when the variable display is started. , the time when the stop display is started, and the lottery results indicated by the symbols stopped and displayed are associated with each other.
And, when the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (small hit symbol), or the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device When the (stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (small winning symbol), a small winning game state which is a game state advantageous to the player is generated.
In addition, when the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (jackpot symbol), or the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device ( When the stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (big win symbol), a big win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.

The normal pattern display device can perform variable display and stop display of normal patterns consisting of numbers, patterns, and the like. Then, in the normal pattern display device, the results of the normal pattern lottery are displayed by the stopped normal symbols. Then, when the normal pattern stopped and displayed on the normal pattern display device becomes a specific pattern (normal pattern per pattern), the normal pattern per game state which is a game state advantageous to the player is generated.

The special figure 1 reservation display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is withheld (the number of special figure 1 reservations).
The special figure 2 reservation display device displays the number of times (special figure 2 reservation number) that the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is withheld.
The normal pattern lottery holding display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is held (the number of normal pattern holdings).
The round display device displays the number of round games executed during the jackpot game state (type of jackpot game state).
The right-handed display device displays the path (left-handed path or right-handed path) for hitting the game ball.
The current game state (executing or stopping the time saving control) is displayed on the time saving display device.

Also, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with one or a plurality of movable units (not shown). In this embodiment, the front frame unit 4 is provided with one or more movable units, and the game board unit 10 is provided with one or more movable units.
Each movable body unit of the front frame unit 4 is arranged on the front surface of the design part 40, the upper surface of the receiving plate unit SU, etc., and is capable of performing a predetermined performance action.
Each movable unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set board. Specifically, each movable body unit is disposed in a space (hereinafter referred to as “effect space”) between the game board 11 and the image display device 31 (display screen 31a). Each movable body unit can perform a predetermined performance action in the performance space.
Each movable body unit includes an effect member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 24 (see FIG. 28). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 28) is used as a drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. Note that a configuration using a solenoid as a drive source may be employed.
The effect member can be displaced along a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the effect member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and a effect position. The effect member is driven (displaced) by a motor 23 .

The position detection sensor 24 is configured by a photosensor or the like. The position detection sensor 24 detects the position of the production member. Specifically, the position detection sensor 24 includes a light projecting section and a light receiving section that receives light projected from the light projecting section. Then, the position detection sensor 24 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 in accordance with the reception (detection) of the light projected from the light projecting unit by the light receiving unit. On the other hand, the position detection sensor 24 stops outputting the detection signal to the effect control board 300 when the light receiving section does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light projecting section.
A shield plate is provided at a predetermined position of the effect member. Then, when the effect member is arranged at the initial position, the shielding plate is arranged between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor 24 to block the light from entering the light receiving portion. Thereby, when the effect member is arranged at the initial position, the output of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 24 to the effect control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the production member is not arranged at the initial position, a detection signal is output from the position detection sensor 24 to the production control board 300 .
Thereby, the effect control board 300 can detect whether or not the effect member is arranged at the initial position depending on the input state of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 24 .

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with detection sensors for detecting various abnormal states.
In this embodiment, as detection sensors, a glass frame opening sensor 107, an inner frame opening sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, and the like are arranged.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects opening of the front frame unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3 . Then, the glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 according to the opening of the front frame unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3 .
The inner frame open sensor 108 detects opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2 . Then, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 according to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2 .

The vibration detection sensor 113 detects vibration of the game board 11 . In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is arranged on the game board 11 . Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of vibration of the game board 11 .
The radio wave detection sensor 114 detects radio waves generated around the game board 11 . In this embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are arranged on the game board 11 . Each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of radio waves.
The magnetism detection sensor 115 detects magnetism generated around the game board 11 . In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is arranged in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). Also, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged on the game board 11 . Then, the magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to detection of magnetism. Further, each magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged on the game board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in accordance with detection of magnetism.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 includes various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28, the pachinko machine 1 supplies power (electric power) to the main control board 200, the performance control board 300, the payout control board 400, and the respective control boards 200, 300, 400, etc. A plurality of control boards such as a power supply board 600, a driver board 330, and a sub-connection board 340 are provided.
The plurality of control boards 200, 300, 400, 600 are independent (separate) circuit boards. Each control board 200, 300, 400, 600 is housed in a separate board case.
The main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10 . Specifically, the main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11 .
The payout control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3 . Specifically, the payout control board 400 is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3 .

(Configuration of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be described.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 includes a one-chip microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer), a clock generation circuit 202, a random number generation circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, and a sink. It includes a driver 240, source drivers 250a and 250b, and the like.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI integrated with a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, and the like.

The main control board 200 includes a memory area used by the CPU 210 . As shown in FIG. 6, the memory area used by the CPU 210 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230. .
The ROM 220 includes a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and an unused area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 includes a program area, an unused area, and a data area. The program area stores a program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game. The data area stores data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game. Note that the used area m1 may be configured without an unused area.

The unused area m2 includes a program area and a data area.
The program area includes a program (program code) for executing processing related to the test stipulated by gaming machine regulations and a program (program code) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (specifically, calculating the base ratio). code) and are stored. The data area stores data (program data) for executing processing related to tests defined by gaming machine regulations and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 .
Further, in the ROM 220, an unused area m3 of predetermined bytes (for example, 16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area m1 and the unused area m2. This clarifies the boundary between the use area m1 and the non-use area m2.

The RAM 230 includes a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and an unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The use area M1 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. Note that the used area M1 may be configured without including an unused area.
Specifically, the work area includes a setting value area, a gaming machine state flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error related area, a normal game related area 1, and a normal game related area 2. is composed of
A setting value is stored in the setting value area. A gaming machine status flag is stored in the gaming machine status flag area. A checksum is stored in the checksum area. A backup flag is stored in the backup flag area. Information about errors is stored in the error-related area. The normal game-related area 1 stores a sub-command pointer and the like. The normal game-related area 2 stores input/output data in the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), lottery results, flags for managing the game state, and the like. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 stores the game information acquired triggered by the input of the detection signal from each of the special figure 1 start opening switch 101, the special figure 2 start opening switch 102, and the operation opening switch 104 It is configured including an area (game information storage area, which will be described later).

The unused area M2 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests stipulated by game machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). It is used as an area for temporarily storing various data. On the other hand, the stack area is during execution of a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests defined by game machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). In addition, it is used as an area for temporarily saving various data.
Specifically, the work area includes a performance display related area. The performance display related area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program for controlling the display of performance display device 206 .
In addition, the RAM 230 is provided with an unused area M3 of predetermined bytes (16 bytes or more) between the used area M1 and the unused area M2. This clarifies the boundary between the used area M1 and the non-used area M2.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 [MHz] in this embodiment) and outputs this clock to the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203 respectively.
A random number generating circuit 203 includes a first loop counter for generating a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter for generating a big winning random number for the first special symbol lottery, and a second loop counter for generating a big winning random number for the second special symbol lottery. It includes a 3rd loop counter and a 4th loop counter that generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A winning random number for a normal pattern lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).

The third loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter keeps the value of the loop counter within a predetermined range (0 to 10006 in this embodiment) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once at the clock frequency divided by 32). within range) to generate a reach group random number. In this embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s]/12 [MHz]=2.666 [μs]).

The input port 204 includes a plurality of input ports (input port 0 to input port 3 in this embodiment).
Input port 0 receives a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107, a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108, a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113, a detection signal from one of the radio wave detection sensors 114, and a magnetic detection sensor 115. A detection signal or the like from is input.
Input port 1 receives a RAM clear signal from RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from setting key switch 208, a steering wheel detection signal from firing condition detector 422, and the like.
The input port 2 receives a detection signal from the count switch 103, a detection signal from the other winning opening switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, a detection signal from the other radio wave detection sensor 114, and the like.
To the input port 3, a detection signal from the special figure 1 starting opening switch 101, a detection signal from the special figure 2 starting opening switch 102, a detection signal from the operation opening switch 104, etc. are input.

Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (detection signal). In the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor, 1-bit data indicating the reception state of the detection signal from the switch/sensor is set.
Specifically, in the receiving storage area corresponding to each switch sensor, "1" is set when the detection signal from the switch sensor is input (high level), and the switch sensor "0" is set when the detection signal from is not input (low level).

The output port 205 includes a plurality of output ports (output port 0 to output port 4 in this embodiment).
The output port 0 outputs data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 . A data signal output from the output port 0 is input to the source driver 250a.
The output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and a launch enable signal for detecting launch conditions, which will be described later. A common signal output from the output port 1 is input to the sink driver 240 .

Output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450 .
The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the drive of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the drive of the special electric accessory solenoid 65, and a control signal for controlling the drive of the V-region solenoid 66. etc.
The output port 4 outputs data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the performance display device 206 . A data signal output from the output port 4 is input to the source driver 250b.

Also, the main control board 200 is configured to include a command output port 1 and a command output port 2 . Then, the CPU 210 transmits a control command (subcommand) from the command output port 1 to the performance control board 300, and transmits a control command (payout command) to the payout control board 400 from the command output port 2. do.
Command output port 1 and command output port 2 each include a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), a transmission shift register (not shown), have.
The transmission data register outputs the control command input based on the subcommand transmission processing (step S2-4), which will be described later, to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is composed of multiple registers and is capable of storing multiple control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the input order.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits it to the effect control board 300 or the payout control board 400 as serial data.

Performance display device 206 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light-emitting element (LED in this embodiment). It should be noted that the performance display device 206 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11, so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player.
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the state of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "game machine state") includes a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting error state, and a RAM error state. , and a backup abnormal state are defined. The information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes according to the gaming machine state that has occurred.

The performance display device 206 includes four (four-digit) display units (not shown). Each display section is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is composed of a 7-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot-segment LED capable of displaying dots such as a decimal point.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 includes 32 lighting elements (LED33 to LED64). In the performance display device 206, LED33 to LED40 are the first digit display portion, LED41 to LED48 are the second digit display portion, LED49 to LED56 are the third digit display portion, and LED57 to LED64. is the fourth digit display.

The game can be played while the playable state is being generated. Then, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring.
In this embodiment, while the playable state is occurring, the performance display device 206 changes the first base ratio and the second base ratio every predetermined time (5.0 [s] in this embodiment). , are displayed alternately.
The “first base ratio” is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the current time).
The “second base ratio” is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio) is displayed by the upper two-digit display portion of the four-digit display portion. A number indicating the base ratio (percentage) is displayed by the lower two digits of the display.

While the setting change state is occurring, the setting value can be changed. While the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the setting change state is occurring is displayed by the display portion of the upper three digits of the display portion of the four digits (specifically, ""n." is displayed in the upper two digits, and "-" is displayed in the upper third digit. be done.
While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting value can be confirmed. While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is displayed by the display section of the upper three digits of the display section of four digits (specifically, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring (specifically, ""r" is displayed in the upper two digits, and "n." be.

The game cannot progress while the game stop state (setting error state, RAM error state, and backup error state) is occurring. Then, while the game stop state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the game stop state is occurring is displayed by the display portion of the upper three digits of the display portion of the four digits (specifically, information indicating that the game stop state is occurring (specifically, ""E" is displayed in the upper two digits, "r." A number indicating the error code corresponding to the status) is displayed.

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. In other words, the RAM clear switch 207 includes an operation unit that can be pressed. The RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is pressed.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. That is, the setting key switch 208 is configured including an operation portion provided with a keyhole. The operation unit is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole, and can be rotated (switched) from the OFF state to the ON state. The setting key switch 208 outputs a detection signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is in the ON state.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of common signals to the respective display devices 60 and 206 according to the common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) output from the output port 1. FIG.
The source driver 250a controls the output of data signals to the main display device 60 according to the data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 0. FIG.
The source driver 250b controls the output of data signals to the performance display device 206 according to the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4. FIG.

In the pachinko machine 1, a source driver 250a corresponding to the main display device 60 and a source driver 250b corresponding to the performance display device 206 are provided. The application of the power supply voltage Vcc to the data signal lines is individually controlled by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 .
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, a sink driver 240 common to the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 is provided. Grounding of the common signal line is collectively controlled by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 .
This eliminates the need to provide sink drivers 240 corresponding to the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, respectively. output port) is no longer necessary.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts required to control the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and the main control board 200 (CPU 210) can be used to control the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the control load for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 .

The main control board 200 also includes a test signal output circuit (not shown).
CPU210, in the test signal output process (step S4-24) to be described later, generates test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, execution state of time saving control, probability state of special symbol lottery, etc.) and stores the generated test signal in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from the predetermined output port. A test signal output from a predetermined output port is input to an interface board of a test computer (not shown) via a test signal output circuit.
In addition, in the main control board 200, the detection signal from the special figure 1 starter switch 101, the detection signal from the special figure 2 starter switch 102, the detection signal from the operation mouth switch 104, the detection signal from the count switch 103, etc. A detection signal from the winning slot switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and the like are input to the input port 204, and are also input to the interface board of the computer for testing via the test signal output circuit.
Furthermore, in the main control board 200, a control signal for controlling the driving of each solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64, special electric accessory solenoid 65, V area solenoid 66, etc.) output from the output port 3 is The signal is input to the solenoids 64 to 66 and to the interface board of the computer for testing via the test signal output circuit.

(Configuration of payout control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the payout control board 400 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing configurations of a firing condition detection circuit and a firing control circuit.
The payout control board 400 controls the shooting of game balls to the game area 30 and the payout of game balls.
The payout control board 400 includes a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI integrated with a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation (prize ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control board 200 . Also, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation (rental ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit 700 .
In addition, the payout control board 400 includes a resistance value (voltage value) input from the firing volume 411, a touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, a firing stop signal input from the firing stop switch 413, and a main control board. Based on the launch permission signal input from 200 and the CR connection signal input from CR unit 700, the game ball shooting operation by game ball shooting device 430 (shooting solenoid 431) is controlled.
Hereinafter, a method for controlling the game ball shooting operation by the payout control board 400 will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 29, the payout control board 400 includes a launch condition detection circuit 420 and a launch control circuit 425 as circuits for controlling the game ball payout operation.
The firing condition detection circuit 420 is a circuit that detects establishment of firing conditions, which will be described later.
The firing condition detection circuit 420 includes an operation detection section 421 , a firing condition detection section 422 and a firing condition detection section 423 .
The operation detection unit 421 is a circuit that detects a rotation operation (amount of rotation operation) of the handle operation unit.
The operation detection unit 421 includes an operational amplifier that controls the output of the operation detection signal (makes the operation detection signal high level or low level) according to the resistance value (voltage value) of the emission volume 411 .

Specifically, in the firing handle unit 6, the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes according to the amount of rotation operation of the handle operation section. Then, the operation detection unit 421 detects the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411, and based on the detected resistance value (voltage value), the presence or absence of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit and the rotation operation of the handle operation unit. Quantity and to detect.
Then, the operation detection unit 421 generates an operation detection signal while detecting a rotation operation of the handle operation unit, and outputs the generated operation detection signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (operation detection signal to high level). On the other hand, the operation detection unit 421 stops outputting the operation detection signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (makes the operation detection signal low level) when the rotation operation of the handle operation unit is not detected.
In addition, the operation detection unit 421 generates a firing intensity signal corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the handle operation unit (resistance value of the firing volume 411) while detecting the rotation operation of the handle operation unit, and the generated firing An intensity signal is output to firing control circuit 425 .

The firing enable condition detection unit 422 is a circuit that detects establishment of the firing enable condition.
The firing enable condition detection unit 422 includes an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls the output/stop of a predetermined signal in accordance with the AND operation result of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the firing stop signal, and an AND gate. and a transistor for switching output/stop of the steering wheel detection signal according to a predetermined signal output from the IC.
The "fireable condition" is a condition related to the player's operation (player's intention) among the plurality of conditions constituting the later-described firing condition.
The firing enable conditions include (1) a condition based on the detection status of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (detection status of the rotation operation of the handle operation part), and (2) a detection status of the touch sensor 412 (a player's handle and (3) a condition based on the detection status of the firing stop switch 413 (detection status of the pressing operation of the firing stop button).

In this embodiment, (1) the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 have detected the rotation operation of the handle operation unit, and (2) the touch sensor 412 has detected the player's contact with the handle operation unit. and (3) that the firing stop switch 413 does not detect that the firing stop button has been pressed down, the firing enable condition is met. On the other hand, when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the condition for enabling shooting is not established.
Here, the firing enable conditions are (1) a condition based on the detection state of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (detection state of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit), and (2) the detection state of the touch sensor 412 (player and (3) the condition based on the detection status of the firing stop switch 413 (the detection status of the pressing operation of the firing stop button) is not included. I don't mind.
That is, (1) the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 have detected the rotation operation of the handle operation unit, and (2) the touch sensor 412 has detected the player's contact with the handle operation unit. When both conditions of (1) and (2) are satisfied, the firing enable condition is satisfied, and when at least one of the conditions (1) and (2) is not satisfied, the firing enable condition is not satisfied. I don't mind.

Specifically, the firing condition detection unit 422 detects an operation detection signal input from the operation detection unit 421, a touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, and a firing stop signal input from the firing stop switch 413. Based on this, it detects whether or not the conditions for enabling the launch are met.
At this time, the firing condition detection unit 422 detects that the firing condition is established when all of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the firing stop signal are input. On the other hand, when at least one signal among the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the firing stop signal is not input, the fulfillment of the firing enable condition is not detected.
The firing condition detection unit 422 generates a handle detection signal when detecting that the firing condition is satisfied, and sends the generated handle detection signal to the main control board 200 and the firing condition detection unit 423 respectively. output (set the steering wheel detection signal to high level). On the other hand, the firing condition detection unit 422 stops outputting the handle detection signal to each of the main control board 200 and the firing condition detection unit 423 (lowers the handle detection signal) when it does not detect that the firing condition is satisfied. level).

The firing condition detection unit 423 is a circuit that detects establishment of firing conditions.
The firing condition detection unit 423 includes an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls the output/stop of the firing signal in accordance with the AND operation result of the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal. be.
The "shooting condition" is a condition for executing shooting of a game ball (game ball shooting operation) to the game area 30 by the game ball shooting device 430 (shooting solenoid 431).
In this embodiment, (1) the firing enable condition is met, (2) the firing permission signal is input from the main control board 200, and (3) the CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700. The firing condition is met when all the conditions of On the other hand, when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the launch condition is not established.
The "fire permission signal" indicates that communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is possible (the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected). As a premise, it is output from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection section 423 when the playable state is set.

Here, during the period when the main control board 200 is powered on, regardless of the state of the gaming machine, the firing permission signal may be output from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection section 423. do not have. That is, when communication is possible between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 (when the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected), the firing permission signal However, it may be configured such that it is output from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection section 423 .
When the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 are in a communicable state (when the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected), the "CR connection signal" It is output from the CR unit 700 to the firing condition detection section 423 .

Specifically, the firing condition detection section 423 detects a handle detection signal input from the firing condition detection section 422, a firing permission signal input from the main control board 200, and a CR connection signal input from the CR unit 700. , to detect whether or not the launch condition is met.
At this time, the firing condition detector 423 detects that the firing condition is established when all of the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal are input. On the other hand, when at least one signal among the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal is not input, the fulfillment of the firing condition is not detected.
The firing condition detector 423 generates a firing signal while detecting that the firing condition is established, and outputs the generated firing signal to the firing control circuit 425 (making the firing signal high level). On the other hand, the firing condition detector 423 stops outputting the firing signal to the firing control circuit 425 (makes the firing signal low level) when it does not detect that the firing condition is met.

The shooting control circuit 425 is a circuit that controls the shooting intensity of the game ball by the game ball shooting device 430 and the shooting timing of the game ball by the game ball shooting device 430 . That is, the shooting control circuit 425 controls the output of the drive signal to the game ball shooting device 430 (shooting solenoid 431).
Specifically, the firing control circuit 425 includes a clock generating section (not shown), a firing timing control section (not shown), and a firing solenoid driving section (not shown).
The clock generator outputs a clock signal with a predetermined frequency to the launch timing controller.
The firing timing control section generates a pulse signal for controlling firing timing based on the clock signal input from the clock generating section, and outputs the generated pulse signal to the firing solenoid driving section. At this time, the launch timing control section generates a pulse signal so that the number of game balls launched per minute is a predetermined number (for example, 100 [balls]).

The firing solenoid drive unit activates the firing solenoid based on the firing signal input from the firing condition detection unit 423, the pulse signal input from the firing timing control unit, and the firing intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421. It controls the output of drive signals to 431 .
Specifically, when the firing signal is input from the firing condition detecting section 423, the firing solenoid drive section receives input from the operation detecting section 421 triggered by the pulse signal input from the firing timing control section. A drive signal (driving current) corresponding to the emission intensity signal is output to the emission solenoid 431 . As a result, the game ball is shot with an intensity corresponding to the shot intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421 .
On the other hand, the firing solenoid drive section stops outputting the drive signal to the firing solenoid 431 when the firing signal is not input from the firing condition detection section 423 . As a result, the shooting of the game ball is stopped.

The game ball shooting device 430 includes a ball-striking mallet (not shown) and a shooting solenoid 431 for driving the ball-striking mallet. The firing solenoid 431 is composed of a rotary solenoid. Here, the ball hitting mallet may be driven by another drive source such as a motor.
A game ball is supplied to the game ball launcher 430 from a ball feeding unit (not shown). Then, when a drive signal is input to the shooting solenoid 431, the shooting solenoid 431 is driven according to the input drive signal, and a game ball is shot out by the ball hitting mallet. As a result, the game ball is shot to the game area 30. - 特許庁

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, on the premise that the main control board 200 is set to the playable state and the communication between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 is possible, the shooting is stopped. When the handle operation unit is rotated (displaced from the initial position toward the limit position side) by contact with the player without pressing the button, the game ball shooting operation by the game ball shooting device 430 is started. . During execution of the game ball shooting operation by the game ball shooting device 430, the game ball is shot to the game area 30 with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the handle operation section.
Further, when the shooting stop button is pressed, the game ball shooting operation by the game ball shooting device 430 is stopped. That is, even when the handle operation portion is rotated by the player's contact, the game ball shooting operation by the game ball shooting device 430 is stopped when the shooting stop button is pressed.
Further, when the handle operation portion is returned to the initial position (when the handle operation portion is not rotated), the game ball shooting operation by the game ball shooting device 430 is stopped. In other words, even when the player is in contact with the handle operating portion, the shooting operation of the game ball by the game ball shooting device 430 is stopped when the handle operating portion is returned to the initial position.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the output of the handle detection signal from the ready-to-fire condition detector 422 to the main control board 200 is maintained while the ready-to-fire condition is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as the "ready-to-fire state"). be done.
In other words, a state in which a rotation operation of the handle operation unit is detected, a contact to the handle operation unit is detected, and a pressing operation of the firing stop button is not detected (fireable state) is occurring. Meanwhile, the output of the handle detection signal from the firing condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
At this time, as long as the firing enable state is occurring, regardless of whether or not a firing permission signal is input from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection circuit 420 (regardless of the game machine state set in the main control board 200). ), the output of the handle detection signal from the firing condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
Also, as long as the firing ready state is occurring, regardless of whether or not the CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700 to the firing condition detection circuit 420 (communication between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 is possible state, the output of the handle detection signal from the firing condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
As described above, it becomes possible for the main control board 200 to detect (grasp) whether or not the ready-to-fire state is occurring, and control the progress of the game, the content of the effects, etc. according to the state of occurrence of the ready-to-fire state. It becomes possible to

That is, when the main control board 200 detects that the steering wheel detection signal has changed from the state in which it is not input to the state in which it is input (the steering wheel detection signal has changed from low level to high level), it is possible to fire. A game situation designation command that designates the occurrence (start) of the state is transmitted to the effect control board 300. - 特許庁
On the other hand, when the main control board 200 detects that the steering wheel detection signal has changed from the input state to the non-input state (the steering wheel detection signal has changed from high level to low level), it is possible to fire. A game situation designation command designating release (end) of the state is transmitted to the effect control board 300 .
As a result, the effect control board 300 detects the occurrence of the ready-to-fire state by receiving the game situation specifying command specifying the occurrence of the ready-to-fire state, and receives the game situation specifying command to specify the release of the ready-to-fire state It becomes possible to detect release of the ready-to-fire state.
Then, the effect control board 300 can change the content of the effect depending on whether or not the state of being ready to be fired is occurring.

(Configuration of production control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the effect control board.
The effect control board 300 controls effects (display effects, sound effects, lamp effects, movable object effects, etc.) based on control commands received from the main control board 200 .
As shown in FIG. 30 , the effect control board 300 includes a microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 301 and various external devices externally connected to the microcomputer 301 .
In this embodiment, various external devices include a control ROM 302, a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 303, a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) 304, and the like.

The control ROM 302 stores a control program for controlling the operation of the microcomputer 301, various data necessary for executing the control program, and the like. In particular, the control ROM 302 stores effect scenario data corresponding to each effect number, animation data corresponding to each display effect number, sound scenario data corresponding to each sound effect number, lamp scenario data corresponding to each lamp effect number, Movable body scenario data corresponding to the movable body rendering number, various compression lamp drive data, and various compression motor drive data are stored (stored).
The "compressed lamp driving data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) the lamp driving data in a predetermined format. "Lamp drive data" is data for driving various lamps 20 and 21 (data specifying luminance values of lamps 20 and 21 belonging to each system).
The "compressed motor drive data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) the motor drive data in a predetermined format. "Motor driving data" is data for driving various motors 23 (data defining the output value of each motor 23).
In this embodiment, a NOR flash memory (NOR ROM) is used as the control ROM 302 . Here, as the control ROM 302, an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) may be used.
Control ROM 302 is connected to HOST interface 313 of microcomputer 301 .

The CGROM 303 stores (stores) various compressed image data, various compressed audio data, and the like.
"Compressed image data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) image data (material data) in a predetermined format. "Image data (material data)" is data of an image (moving image/still image) that is a material for drawing processing.
"Compressed audio data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) audio data in a predetermined format. “Audio data” is audio data output from various speakers 22 .
In this embodiment, a NAND flash memory (NAND ROM) is used as the CGROM 303 . Specifically, the CGROM 303 is configured by an SSD (Solid State Drive) using a NAND flash memory as a storage unit.
CGROM 303 is connected to CG bus interface 314 of microcomputer 301 . The CG bus interface 314 is a SATA (Serial AT Attachment) standard connection interface. As a result, various data stored in the CGROM 303 are read by SATA transfer.

The DRAM 304 is provided with a preload area. Various data (specifically, compressed image data, compressed audio data, etc.) stored in the CGROM 303 are transferred (preloaded) to the preload area.
The DRAM 304 is also provided with a drawing command buffer area, a sound command buffer area, a lamp command buffer area, and a motor command buffer area. In this embodiment, the drawing command buffer area adopts a double buffering method, and the DRAM 304 is provided with two drawing command buffer areas.
The two drawing command buffer areas are configured with the same size. While one of the two drawing command buffer areas is designated as the construction area, the other drawing command buffer area is designated as the transfer area. Designation of the construction area and designation of the transfer area are alternately switched for each drawing command buffer area for each frame.
For each drawing command buffer area, a display list, which will be described later, is stored (generated and constructed) in the drawing command buffer area during the period designated as the construction area, and during the period designated as the transfer area. , the display list stored in the drawing command buffer area is transferred to the VDP (specifically, the preloader circuit 319).
DRAM 304 is connected to DRAM interface 315 of microcomputer 301 .

A microcomputer 301 is an LSI integrated with a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like.
The microcomputer 301 controls production operations by various production means based on control commands received from the main control board 200 .
"Various production means" includes an image display device 31, various speakers 22, various lamps 20 and 21, and various motors 23 (various movable bodies). Therefore, the "effect operations by various means of effect" include display of effect images by the image display device 31, output of sound by the various speakers 22, driving (lighting) of the various lamps 20 and 21, various motors 23 (various movable bodies ) is included.
The microcomputer 301 includes a CPU 310, a CPU work memory 311, a CPU interface 312, a host interface 313, a CG bus interface 314, a DRAM interface 315, a VRAM 316, a serial communication controller 317, a transfer circuit 318, a preloader circuit 319, a display circuit 320, a graphic It includes internal devices such as a sound decoder circuit 321, a drawing circuit 322, and a sound controller 323, and these internal devices are connected to a data bus 324. FIG.

The CPU 310 is connected to the HOST interface 313 via the CPU interface 312 . The HOST interface 313 is also connected to the main control board 200 and receives control commands from the main control board 200 . Furthermore, a data bus 324 is connected to the HOST interface 313 .
This allows the CPU 310 to receive control commands (sub-commands) from the main control board 200 via the HOST interface 313 .
Also, the CPU 310 can communicate with internal devices such as the serial communication controller 317, the preloader circuit 319, the display circuit 320, and the sound controller 323 via the HOST interface 313 and data bus 324. .
The CPU 310 can also read various data (control programs, control data, etc.) stored in the control ROM 302 via the HOST interface 313 .
The CPU 310 can also read various data (compressed audio data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the HOST interface 313 , data bus 324 and CG bus interface 314 .
Furthermore, the CPU 310 can execute data reading/writing with respect to the DRAM 304 via the HOST interface 313 , data bus 324 and DRAM interface 315 .

The CPU 310 executes various kinds of arithmetic processing required to control the performance operations by various kinds of performance means, control processing of internal devices according to the various kinds of arithmetic processing, and the like.
At this time, the CPU 310 uses the CPU work memory (RAM) 311 and the DRAM 304 as a work area for various arithmetic processing, a buffer area for various arithmetic processing data, a table data area, a buffer area for various input/output data, and the like. do.
That is, the CPU 310 selects the effect (effect number) to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and various scenario data (effect scenario data, animation data, sound scenario data) corresponding to the selected effect number. data, ramp scenario data, movable body scenario data, etc.) are selected and set. Internal commands (drawing commands, sound commands, lamp commands, motor commands, etc.).

Specifically, the CPU 310 generates a display list in the drawing command buffer area designated as the construction area according to the animation data.
A "display list" is a collection of drawing commands for one frame. That is, the display list describes drawing commands for one frame in a predetermined order. Then, in VDP, drawing data for one frame is generated by executing processing based on each drawing command in the order described in the display list.
The "drawing command" is information specifying the content of the drawing process (drawing control) to be executed by the VDP. In particular, the drawing command includes the address of the storage area where the compressed image data used for drawing is stored (hereinafter referred to as "image address"), the magnification (enlargement/reduction ratio) at the time of drawing the image data, the Coordinates for drawing image data (coordinates in the frame buffer area) and the like are specified.
Further, CPU 310 generates a sound command in the sound command buffer area according to the sound scenario data.
The “sound command” is information specifying the contents of the audio output processing (audio output control) to be executed by the sound controller 323 .
Further, CPU 310 generates a lamp command in the lamp command buffer area according to the lamp scenario data.
The "lamp command" is information specifying the contents of the lamp driving process (lamp driving control) to be executed by the lamp controller 317a.
Further, CPU 310 generates a motor command in the motor command buffer area according to the movable body scenario data.
The "motor command" is information specifying the contents of motor drive processing (motor drive control) to be executed by the motor controller 317b.

Also, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 when the power is turned on.
That is, the NAND type flash memory such as the CGROM 303 is easier to increase the capacity than the NOR type flash memory such as the control ROM 302, but the data reading speed is slow. Therefore, if the compressed audio data is read directly from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the sound controller 323 executes the audio output process, the processing performance may drop significantly.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, before executing the voice output process, the compressed voice data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is storage means having a faster data read speed than the CGROM 303. . By adopting a configuration in which the compressed audio data is read from the DRAM 304 when the audio output process is executed, deterioration in processing performance is prevented.

Specifically, when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) predetermined compressed audio data among the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 . At this time, in this embodiment, all compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 are transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304 . Here, part of the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 may be transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304 .
After the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, the pachinko machine 1 enters a state in which it is possible to control the output of audio from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound controller 323). In other words, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes impossible to control the output of audio from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound controller 323).
Further, after the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, the image display device 31 is ready to control the display of the effect image (drawing process by VDP). In other words, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes impossible to control the display of the effect image by the image display device 31 (drawing processing by VDP).
On the other hand, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to control the driving (emission) of the various lamps 20 and 21 (lamp driving processing by the lamp controller 317a).
Further, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to control the driving of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (motor driving processing by the motor controller 317b).

The transfer circuit 318 transfers various data between internal devices.
Specifically, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the display list stored in the drawing command buffer area designated as the transfer area to the preloader circuit 319 . The transfer circuit 318 also transfers the display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 to the drawing circuit 322 .
The transfer circuit 318 also transfers the sound command stored in the sound command buffer area to the sound controller 323 . The transfer circuit 318 also transfers the lamp command stored in the lamp command buffer area to the lamp controller 317a. The transfer circuit 318 also transfers the motor command stored in the motor command buffer area to the motor controller 317b.

The VRAM 316 is provided with an image expansion area. Image data (material data) developed (restored/decoded) by the graphics decoder circuit 321 is temporarily stored in the image development area.
Also, the VRAM 316 is provided with a frame buffer area. In this embodiment, a double buffering method is adopted for the frame buffer area, and two frame buffer areas are provided in the VRAM 316 .
The two frame buffer areas are configured with the same size. While one of the two frame-buffer areas is designated as the drawing area, the other frame-buffer area is designated as the output area. Designation of the drawing area and designation of the output area are alternately switched for each frame buffer area for each frame.
For each frame buffer area, drawing data for one frame is stored (generated and drawn) during the period designated as the drawing area, and during the period designated as the output area. , the video signal is output based on the drawing data for one frame stored in the frame buffer area.

In the microcomputer 301, the preloader circuit 319, display circuit 320, graphics decoder circuit 321, drawing circuit 322, etc. function as a VDP (Video Display Processor).
The VDP controls display of effect images by the image display device 31 . Specifically, the VDP generates drawing data in response to receiving a display list (drawing command) from the CPU 310, generates a video signal based on the generated drawing data, and displays the generated video signal as an image. Output to device 31 .
The preloader circuit 319 can read various data (compressed image data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the CG bus interface 314 .
In particular, the preloader circuit 319 transfers (preloads) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 before the rendering process by the rendering circuit 322 is executed.
That is, as described above, the NAND type flash memory such as the CGROM 303 is easier to increase the capacity than the NOR type flash memory such as the control ROM 302, but the data reading speed is slow. Therefore, if the compressed image data is read directly from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the drawing circuit 322 executes drawing processing, the processing performance may be significantly reduced.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the compressed image data previously stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is a storage means having a faster data read speed than the CGROM 303, before the drawing process is executed. By adopting a configuration in which the compressed image data is read from the DRAM 304 when the drawing process is executed, the deterioration of the processing performance is prevented.

Specifically, each time the preloader circuit 319 receives a display list, the preloader circuit 319 loads one frame of compressed image data specified by the display list out of the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 into the preload area of the DRAM 304 . transfer (preload) to At this time, the preloader circuit 319 rewrites the display list.
That is, in the display list generated by the CPU 310, an address designating the storage area of the CGROM 303 is described as an image address included in each drawing command. Therefore, the preloader circuit 319 loads the compressed image data stored in the storage area (storage area of the CGROM 303) specified by the image address included in the drawing command for each drawing command included in the display list into a predetermined area of the DRAM 304. , the image address included in the drawing command is rewritten to an address designating the storage area (predetermined area of the DRAM 304) after the transfer. As a result, a new display list with rewritten image addresses is generated.
In this embodiment, the preloader circuit 319 transfers (preloads) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 . However, the preloader circuit 319 may transfer the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a predetermined area (preload area) of the VRAM 316 .
The display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 is transferred to the drawing circuit 320 by the transfer circuit 318 .

The drawing circuit 322 stores (generates/renders) drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area according to the display list received from the preloader circuit 319 .
Specifically, each time the drawing circuit 320 receives a display list, the drawing circuit 320 reads from the DRAM 304 one frame of compressed image data specified in the display list. One frame of compressed image data read from the DRAM 304 is restored (decoded/decoded) by the graphic decoder circuit 321 and stored (expanded) in the image expansion area of the VRAM 316 . The rendering circuit 320 then uses the image data stored in the image rendering area to generate rendering data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated as the rendering area.

The display circuit 320 generates a video signal based on drawing data for one frame stored (generated and drawn) in the frame buffer area designated as the output area, and outputs the generated video signal to the image display device. 31. In this embodiment, digital RGB signals are output as video signals. Here, a configuration in which an LVDS (Low voltage differential signaling) signal is output as the video signal may be employed.
Specifically, the display circuit 320 includes a data acquisition circuit (not shown), a scaler circuit (not shown), a color correction circuit (not shown), a ditherer circuit (not shown), and a synchronization signal generation circuit (not shown). ) etc.
The data acquisition circuit reads the drawing data stored in the frame buffer area designated as the output area.
The scaler circuit can apply scaling processing (enlargement processing/reduction processing) to the drawing data read by the data acquisition circuit.

The color correction circuit can apply color correction processing to the drawing data processed by the scaler circuit.
The ditherer circuit can apply dithering processing to the drawing data processed by the color correction circuit.
The drawing data after processing by the dithering circuit is output as a video signal (digital RGB signal).
A synchronization signal generation circuit generates a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal (Vsync). Then, the synchronizing signal generation circuit outputs the generated horizontal synchronizing signal and vertical synchronizing signal to the image display device 31 . Also, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs the generated vertical synchronization signal to the CPU 310 .
Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the effect image (display of the effect image based on drawing data for one frame) on the image display device 31 is updated every 16.66 [ms]. Therefore, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs a vertical synchronization signal to the CPU 310 (high level) every 16.66 [ms].

The sound controller 323 controls audio output from the various speakers 22 .
Specifically, the sound controller 323 generates an audio signal in response to receiving a sound command from the CPU 310 and outputs the generated audio signal to the various speakers 22 .
The sound controller 323 includes an audio decoder circuit (not shown). Upon receiving a sound command from CPU 310 , the audio decoder circuit reads compressed audio data specified by the sound command from DRAM 304 . It also restores (decodes/decodes) the read compressed audio data. An audio signal is generated based on the restored audio data, and the generated audio signal is output to various speakers 22 .

The serial communication controller 317 includes a lamp controller 317a and a motor controller 317b.
The lamp controller 317a controls driving (light emission) of various lamps 20 and 21 .
Specifically, the lamp controller 317a generates lamp driving data in response to receiving a lamp command from the CPU 310, and outputs the generated lamp driving data to the lamp drivers 332 and 342 together with the clock signal. At this time, the lamp driving data is output as serial data.
The ramp controller 317a includes a ramp decoder circuit (not shown). Upon receiving a lamp command from CPU 310 , the lamp decoder circuit reads compressed lamp driving data specified by the lamp command from control ROM 302 . It also restores (decodes/decodes) the read compressed lamp driving data. Then, it generates lamp driving data based on the restored lamp driving data, and outputs the generated lamp driving data to the lamp drivers 332 and 342 .

The motor controller 317b controls driving of various motors 23 (various movable bodies).
Specifically, the motor controller 317b generates motor driving data in response to receiving a motor command from the CPU 310, and outputs the generated motor driving data to the motor drivers 333 and 343 together with the clock signal. At this time, the motor drive data is output as serial data.
The motor controller 317b includes a motor sequencer circuit (not shown). Upon receiving a motor command from the CPU 310 , the motor sequencer circuit reads compression motor drive data specified by the motor command from the control ROM 302 . It also restores (decodes/decodes) the read compressed motor drive data. Then, based on the restored motor drive data, the motor drive data is generated, and the generated motor drive data is output to the motor drivers 333 and 343 .
Further, the motor controller 317b receives information indicating the detection status of the various sensors 24 from the driver board 330, and information indicating the detection status of the switches 25 to 29 and the information indicating the detection status of the various sensors 24 from the sub-connection board 340. are input.

(Control method of production by production control board 300)
Next, the control method of the production|presentation by the production|presentation control board 300 is demonstrated.
The CPU 310 selects an effect (effect number) to be executed according to the control command received from the main control board 200 . Then, the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected effect number and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area of the DRAM 304 .
"Production scenario data" is information that defines the progress of production. Specifically, a plurality of pieces of process data are registered in chronological order in the production scenario data. That is, the production scenario data registers a plurality of process data and information designating the start time (start timing) of the process based on each process data.
Each process data contains one or more command information. For example, as command information, command information specifying the start of a sub-effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect), sub-effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect) Command information (hereinafter referred to as "production end command") etc. specifying the end of is stipulated.

Also, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the effect based on the effect scenario data set in the effect scenario setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 updates the production scenario timer set in the production scenario setting area at a predetermined cycle, and based on the updated production scenario timer value, the production set in the production scenario setting area. It is determined whether or not there is any process data whose start time has come among the process data registered in the scenario data. When it is determined that there is process data whose start time has come, each command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in the corresponding buffer area.
At this time, the command information regarding the display effect (command information specifying the start of the display effect, command information specifying the end of the display effect, etc.) is stored in the display command buffer area. On the other hand, command information relating to sound effects (command information specifying various sound effect control numbers) is stored in the sound command buffer area. On the other hand, command information relating to the lamp effect (command information specifying the start of the lamp effect, command information specifying the end of the lamp effect, etc.) is stored in the lamp command buffer area. On the other hand, command information (command information specifying the start of the movable body presentation, command information specifying the end of the movable body presentation, etc.) regarding the movable body presentation is stored in the movable body command buffer area.

(Control method of display effects)
Next, a method of controlling the display effect (display) by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The control ROM 302 stores an animation table corresponding to each display effect (each display effect number). An animation table corresponding to each display effect is associated with display priority information corresponding to the display effect (images forming the display effect).
"Display priority information" is information that designates display priority.
"Display priority" is information for designating display (drawing) priority.
Then, when a plurality of display effects (displays) are executed overlapping in time, the display of the display screen 31a (the image displayed on the display screen 31a) is based on the plurality of display effects (images related to the plurality of display effects). effect image) is configured. In this case, among the plurality of display effects (plurality of images) that make up the display (the effect image), the display effect (image) with the higher display priority is displayed with respect to the display effect (image) with the lower display priority. , are displayed with priority. That is, among the plurality of display effects (the plurality of images) forming the effect image, a display effect (image) having a higher display priority is preferentially displayed.
In other words, among the plurality of display effects (plurality of images) that make up the effect image, the display effect (image) with the higher display priority is closer to the player than the display effect (image) with the lower display priority. side). That is, among the plurality of display effects (the plurality of images) forming the effect image, the display effects (images) having higher display priorities are displayed closer to the viewer.
As a result, of the plurality of display effects (plurality of images) that make up the effect image, a display effect (image) with a higher display priority and a display effect (image) with a lower display priority overlap. If there is, a display effect (image) having a higher display priority is preferentially displayed for the overlapping portion.

The CPU 310 (display control unit) determines whether command information is stored in the display command buffer area at a predetermined cycle. Then, when it is determined that command information is stored in the display command buffer area, each command information stored in the display command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, if command information specifying the start of the display effect is stored in the display command buffer area, among the animation tables stored in the control ROM 302, the animation table corresponding to the display effect number specified by the command information is displayed. read out. Then, the read animation table is set (stored/registered) in the animation table setting area of the DRAM 304 .
As a result, the animation table stored in the control ROM 302 is duplicated in the animation table setting area. A plurality of animation tables can be set in the animation table setting area.

The “animation table” is information (various parameters for controlling image display) that defines the progress of display effects (display of effect images) by the image display device 31 . In other words, the animation table is information that defines the movement of images.
Specifically, a predetermined number of pieces of frame information are registered in chronological order in the animation table. Then, for a predetermined number of frame information registered in the animation table, the display effect progresses by sequentially executing the display of the image based on each frame information according to the registered order.
Each piece of frame information is various parameters for controlling (executing/configuring) display of an image for one frame. That is, each frame information includes information (image address information) specifying image data (compressed image data) used for drawing, information (display priority information) specifying the display priority of the image data (the display effect), the image Information that specifies the magnification (magnification/reduction) at the time of drawing data (hereinafter referred to as "display magnification information"), information that specifies the coordinates (coordinates in the frame buffer area) for rendering the image data (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as "display coordinate information"), information specifying the transmittance (transparency, transparency, transparency) at the time of drawing the image data (hereinafter referred to as "transmittance information"), etc. .

Then, CPU 310 controls display of effect images corresponding to each frame based on one or more animation tables set in the animation table setting area.
Specifically, CPU 310 executes a command construction process, which will be described later, at a predetermined cycle.
In the command building process, first, the sub-scenario timer corresponding to each animation data set in the display scenario setting area is updated. Next, based on all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, a display list is constructed in the drawing command buffer area designated in the construction area.
Specifically, for all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, among the frame information registered in each animation table, the frame information selected as the target for constructing the display list is obtained. A display list is constructed based on all the acquired frame information.
As a result, the VDP is controlled according to the display list generated in the drawing command buffer area, and the display effect (display of the effect image by the image display device 31) is controlled.
That is, when one piece of animation data is set in the display scenario setting area, a display list that designates drawing of image data designated by the one piece of animation data is constructed.
On the other hand, when a plurality of animation data are set in the display scenario setting area, it is specified that the image data specified by the plurality of animation data should be drawn in a predetermined order. A display list is constructed.
At this time, based on the display priority specified by the display priority information set in the display scenario setting area, the order of executing the drawing of the image data corresponding to the display priority information is set.

(Sound effect control method)
Next, a method of controlling sound effects by the effect control board 300 will be described.
CPU 310 (sound control unit) determines whether command information is stored in the sound command buffer area at a predetermined cycle. Then, when it is determined that command information is stored in the sound command buffer area, each command information stored in the sound command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
Specifically, the command list corresponding to the sound effect control number specified by the command information is read from the control ROM 302 and the read command list is set in the control register of the sound circuit 323 . As a result, the sound circuit 323 operates according to the command list set in the control register.

(Lamp effect control method)
Next, the control method of the lamp production by the production control board 300 will be described.
CPU 310 periodically determines whether command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area. When it is determined that command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area, each command information stored in the lamp command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, when the command information specifying the start of the lamp effect is stored in the lamp command buffer area, the compressed lamp driving data corresponding to the lamp effect number specified by the command information is read, and the read compressed lamp driving data is read out. is set in the ramp register. As a result, the lamp controller 317a controls the lamp effect (drive (lighting) of the various lamps 20 and 21) according to the compressed lamp drive data set in the lamp register.

(Control method for movable body production)
Next, a method of controlling the movable body effect by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 determines whether command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area at a predetermined cycle. Then, when it is determined that command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area, each command information stored in the movable body command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, when the command information specifying the start of the movable body effect is stored in the movable body command buffer area, the compression motor drive data specified by the command information is read, and the read compression motor drive data is transferred to the motor register. set to As a result, the motor controller 317b controls the movable body effect (drive of various motors 23 (various movable bodies)) according to the compression motor drive data set in the motor register.

(Configuration of Driver Board 330)
The driver board 330 includes a parallel-serial conversion circuit 331 , a lamp driver 332 and a motor driver 333 .
The lamp driver 332 controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system constituting the board surface lamp 21 according to the lamp driving data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, in the lamp driving data, luminance values corresponding to each system constituting the board surface lamp 21 are specified. An excitation signal (driving current) corresponding to the luminance value specified by the lamp driving data is supplied to each system constituting the board lamp 21 . As a result, the driving (light emission) of the light-emitting element groups constituting the system is controlled for each system.
The motor driver 333 generates excitation signals (driving currents) for various motors 23 (motors 23 constituting various movable units) provided in the game board unit 10 according to motor drive data input from the motor controller 317b. to control the output of
At this time, the output value of each motor 23 arranged in the game board unit 10 is specified in the motor driving data. An excitation signal (driving current) corresponding to the output value specified by the motor driving data is supplied to each motor 23 . Thus, the driving of each motor 23 is controlled.
Detection signals from various sensors 24 are input to the parallel-serial conversion circuit 331 . The parallel-serial conversion circuit 331 converts detection signals from the various sensors 24 into serial data and outputs the serial data to the serial communication controller 317 .

(Configuration of Sub Connection Board 340)
The sub-connection board 340 includes a parallel-serial conversion circuit 341 , a lamp driver 342 and a motor driver 343 .
The lamp driver 342 controls driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system constituting the frame lamp 20 according to the lamp driving data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, in the lamp drive data, luminance values corresponding to each system constituting the frame lamp 20 are specified. An excitation signal (driving current) corresponding to the luminance value specified by the lamp driving data is supplied to each system constituting the frame lamp 20 . As a result, the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups forming the system is controlled for each system.
The motor driver 343 generates an excitation signal (drive current) for various motors 23 (motors 23 constituting various movable units) provided in the front frame unit 4 in accordance with motor drive data input from the motor controller 317b. to control the output of
At this time, the output value of each motor 23 arranged in the front frame unit 4 is specified in the motor drive data. An excitation signal (driving current) corresponding to the output value specified by the motor driving data is supplied to each motor 23 . Thus, the driving of each motor 23 is controlled.
Detection signals from various sensors 24 and detection signals from various switches 25 to 29 are input to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 341 . The parallel-serial conversion circuit 341 converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 and the detection signals from the various switches 25 to 29 into serial data and outputs the serial data to the serial communication controller 317 .

(Regarding gaming machine status)
In the pachinko machine 1, six states (specifically, a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting error state, a RAM error state, and a backup error state) are defined as gaming machine states. .
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a gaming machine state flag area. In the gaming machine status flag area, six gaming machine statuses (specifically, playable status, setting change status, setting confirmation status, setting error status, RAM error status, and backup error status) are displayed as gaming machine status flags. ), a value corresponding to any one gaming machine state is stored (set). Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a gaming machine state corresponding to the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is generated.

The "playable state" is a gaming machine state in which a game can be played.
Execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is permitted while the game-enabled state is occurring. As a result, the game (ordinary game and special game) can be progressed.
Also, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring. In addition, information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60 .

The “setting change state” is a game machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be changed.
The configuration change state occurs when the configuration change condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection from the RAM clear switch 207 The setting change condition is established when the signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting change state occurs. be done.
Execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the setting change state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Also, while the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Furthermore, by pressing the RAM clear switch 207 while the setting change state is occurring, the setting value stored in the setting value area can be changed. When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is determined.

The “setting confirmation state” is a game machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be confirmed.
The configuration confirmation state occurs when the configuration confirmation condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection from the RAM clear switch 207 The setting confirmation condition is satisfied when no signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed, the setting confirmation state occurs. be done.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the setting confirmation state is occurring. Thereby, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Also, while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. This makes it possible to confirm the set value stored in the set value area. Also, all the lighting elements that constitute the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
It should be noted that the set values stored in the set value area cannot be changed while the setting confirmation state is occurring.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting confirmation state.

The "setting error state" is a gaming machine state in which a setting error has occurred.
The abnormal setting state is generated when it is determined that the set value set in the set value area is not within the specified range while the playable state is being generated.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the setting error state is occurring. Thereby, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, while the abnormal setting state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the abnormal setting. Also, all the lighting elements that constitute the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the setting error state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause a setting change state.

"RAM abnormal state" is a gaming machine state in which a RAM abnormality occurs.
The RAM abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a read/write abnormality has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
Execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the RAM abnormal state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Further, while the RAM abnormality state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the RAM abnormality. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the RAM abnormal state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause the setting change state.

The “backup abnormality state” is a gaming machine state in which a backup abnormality has occurred.
The backup abnormality state is generated when it is determined that a backup abnormality of the RAM 230 (specifically, a backup flag abnormality or a checksum abnormality) has occurred when the power is turned on.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the backup abnormal state is occurring. Thereby, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, while the backup abnormality is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the backup abnormality. Also, all the lighting elements that constitute the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the backup abnormal state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause a setting change state.

(About setting value)
Next, setting values (setting information) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "set value" is information specifying the probability of winning a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery) (probability of winning a "jackpot"). In this embodiment, values from "0" to "5" are defined as the set values.
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a set value area. Any one of "0" to "5" is stored (set) in the setting value area as the setting value. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is determined according to the value set in the set value area.
In this embodiment, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery corresponding to each setting value is, in order from the highest winning probability, the winning probability corresponding to the setting value = "5", the winning probability corresponding to the setting value = "4". , winning probability corresponding to set value = "3", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "2", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "1", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "0" (winning Probability "high" → Winning probability "low").

Especially, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the setting value stored in the setting value area while the setting change state is occurring. Here, the change of the setting value is executed by the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting A modified state is raised.
While the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. Further, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the set value stored in the set value area is changed. At this time, when the setting value set in the setting value area is changed, the setting value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is determined.

(About base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, the base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210 while the playable state is occurring. In this embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only during the occurrence of a predetermined game state (specifically, during the occurrence of the special figure low probability state and during the stop of the time saving control).
Then, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring.
The "base ratio" is the number of game balls launched into the game area 30 and the predetermined ball entrance (in this embodiment, the first start hole 51, the second start hole 52 and other winning holes 55a to 55e) It is information calculated based on the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball. Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts to the number of out balls.
In this embodiment, the base ratio is calculated for each predetermined section (period). As the predetermined section, a section in which a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 60000 [balls]) of out balls is detected (discharged) is defined. That is, each section starts when the previous section ends, and ends when the number of out-balls detected during the current section reaches a predetermined number (60000 [balls]). Then, the CPU 210 calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each interval.

A predetermined time may be defined as the predetermined section. That is, the CPU 210 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
"Number of out balls" refers to the number of out balls. “Out ball” refers to a game ball ejected from the game area 30 . Specifically, the out ball is a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
In addition, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 may be used as an out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball discharged from the out port 58, and the game ball detected by the out switch 109 may be the out ball.
The "number of payouts" refers to the total number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the first start port 51, the second start port 52 and the other prize winning ports 55a to 55e.

(About time saving control)
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time-saving control as auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During execution of the time saving control, it becomes easier to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 (acquisition of the special figure 2 game information) as compared to when the time saving control is stopped, which is advantageous to the player.
In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the "per normal pattern" by the normal symbol lottery is the same probability during the execution of the time saving control and during the stop of the time saving control. In addition, during the execution of the time saving control, compared with the stop of the time saving control, it may be configured to improve the probability of winning the "general figure hit" by the normal symbol lottery.
In particular, during the execution of the time saving control, the time for performing the variable display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "variation time") is shortened compared to the time when the time saving control is stopped. In addition, during execution of the time saving control, the time for performing the variable display of normal symbols is shortened compared to when the time saving control is stopped. Furthermore, during the execution of the time saving control, compared to the stop of the time saving control, in the game state per normal figure, the number of openings of the normal electric auditors 52a is increased, and the opening time of the normal electric auditors 52a be extended. As a result, during the execution of the time saving control, it becomes easier to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 (acquisition of the special figure 2 game information) as compared to when the time saving control is stopped.

(Regarding various lotteries)
Next, various lotteries executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed when a game ball enters an operation hole 54 as a trigger.
In this embodiment, as a result of the normal symbol lottery, "general pattern hit" and "loss" are defined. Then, regardless of whether the time-saving control is being executed or stopped, the probability of being determined as "normal pattern hit" (winning) by normal pattern lottery (normal pattern winning determination) is 65535/65536.
In addition, in this embodiment, one type of "per normal pattern" is set as the type of per normal per game state generated when the normal symbol lottery is won.
In the case of winning the ``permanent pattern'' (winning the normal pattern lottery), the normal pattern is controlled to be stopped and displayed as the ``permanent pattern'' in the general pattern display device.
On the other hand, when the normal pattern lottery is lost, the normal pattern display device is controlled so as to stop and display the normal pattern as a "missing pattern".

When winning the "per normal pattern", the normal per pattern game state is generated. Then, in the normal game state, the normal electric accessory 52a is displaced (opened) from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second start port 52.例文帳に追加
In the normal per game state, the number of opening times of the normal electric accessory 52a is set to 1 [times] or 3 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 52a at each time is 0.04 [s] or 1 .0 [s].
At this time, during execution of the time saving control, the number of opening times of the normal electric accessory 52a is set to 3 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 52a at each opening is 1.0 [s ] is set.
On the other hand, while the time saving control is stopped, the number of opening times of the normal electric accessory 52a is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 52a at each opening is 0.04 [s]. is set to

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 51, and the second special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. A special design lottery is executed.
In this embodiment, "big win" and "loss" are defined as the result of the first special symbol lottery. On the other hand, as a result of the second special symbol lottery, "big win", "minor win" and "lose" are defined.
In addition, as a result of the first special symbol lottery, a configuration may be adopted in which a "small hit" is defined. In particular, the winning type (type of "small winning pattern") selected when "small winning" is won by the first special symbol lottery may include "small winning (no V)". Here, "small hit (no V)" is a winning type in which it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area while the small win game state is occurring.

In each of the first special symbol lottery (special figure hit determination based on special figure 1 game information) and the second special symbol lottery (special figure hit decision based on special figure 2 game information), the probability of winning the "jackpot" is The probability depends on the set value.
At this time, when the set value=“0”, the probability of winning the “jackpot” by special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is 1/199. On the other hand, when the set value=“1”, the probability of winning the “jackpot” by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is 1/195. On the other hand, when the set value=“2”, the probability of winning the “jackpot” by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is 1/191. On the other hand, when the set value=“3”, the probability of winning the “jackpot” by special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is 1/187. On the other hand, when the set value=“4”, the probability of winning the “big hit” by special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is 1/171. On the other hand, when the set value=“5”, the probability of winning the “jackpot” by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is 1/140.
In the second special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination based on special figure 2 game information), the probability of winning the "small hit" is 1/7.7 regardless of the set value.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the winning type (type of "jackpot design") selected when the "jackpot" is won by the first special pattern lottery, "jackpot 1" and "jackpot 2"("jackpot pattern 1 ” and “big hit pattern 2”) are defined.
If the ``jackpot'' is won by the first special lottery, the probability of selecting ``jackpot 1'' (``jackpot pattern 1'') is 99/100, and ``jackpot 2'' (``jackpot pattern 2'') is selected. 1/100.
On the other hand, "jackpot 3"("jackpot pattern 3") is defined as a winning type (type of "jackpot pattern") selected when a "jackpot" is won by the second special pattern lottery.
When the "big win" is won by the second special symbol lottery, the probability of selecting "big win 3"("big win symbol 3") is 1/1.
On the other hand, as winning types (types of "small winning design") selected when "small winning" is won by the second special symbol lottery, "small winning 1", "small winning 2" and "small winning 3"("small hit pattern 1", "small hit pattern 2" and "small hit pattern 3") are defined.
If the second special symbol lottery wins the "small hit", the probability of selecting "small hit 1"("small hit pattern 1") is 25/100, and "small hit 2"("small hit pattern 2”) is selected is 20/100, and the probability of selecting “small win 3” (“small win symbol 3”) is 55/100.

When "jackpot 1" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "jackpot pattern 1" is stop-displayed on the special figure 1 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "challenge symbol" is stop-displayed.
Here, the "challenge symbol" is a stop symbol suggesting a transition to a "challenge section", which will be described later. The "challenge symbol" is, for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the same even number such as "2, 2, 2". , and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 has a predetermined color.
When the "jackpot 2" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 2" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "super rush symbol" is stop-displayed.
Here, the "super rush symbol" is a stop symbol suggesting a transition to a "super rush section", which will be described later. The "super rush symbol" is, for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the same odd number such as "1, 1, 1". The second production pattern z2 stop-displayed in the second production pattern display area a4 is displayed in a predetermined color while being aligned with "number patterns" showing numbers.
When "big hit 3" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "big hit pattern 3" is stop-displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "super rush symbol" is stop-displayed.

When the "small hit 1" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "small hit pattern 1" is stop-displayed in the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "rush symbol 1" is stop-displayed.
Here, the "rush symbol 1" is, for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the same as "2, 2, 2". , and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 shows a predetermined color.
When the "small hit 2" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "small hit pattern 2" is stop-displayed in the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "rush symbol 2" is stop-displayed.
Here, the "rush symbol 2" is, for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the same as "4, 4, 4". , and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 shows a predetermined color.
When "small hit 3" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "small hit pattern 3" is stop-displayed in the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "rush symbol 3" is stop-displayed.
Here, the "rush symbol 3" is, for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, such as "6, 6, 6". , and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 shows a predetermined color.

If you lose the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) (in the case of "missing"), in the special figure 1 display device or special figure 2 display device, it corresponds to "missing design" A stop symbol (display mode) is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "lost symbol" is stop-displayed.
The "missing symbol" is, for example, among the first effect symbols z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, at least one first effect symbol z1 is the other first effect symbol z1. The second production pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second production pattern display area a4 is displayed in a predetermined color.

When "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 3"("jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 3") are won, a jackpot game state is generated. Then, in the jackpot game state, the special electric accessory 53a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 53.例文帳に追加
Specifically, a predetermined number of round games are executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state.
In this embodiment, when "jackpot 1" or "jackpot 2" is won, the number of round games is set to 5 [times], and when "jackpot 3" is won, the number of round games is set to 2[times]. times].
In addition, when "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 3" are won, the maximum opening time of the special electric accessory 53a in each round game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment). set.
Then, each round game is (1) that the longest opening time has passed since the special electric accessory 53a was opened, and (2) the game to the big winning opening 53 during the execution of the round game The game ends when one of the following conditions is met: that the number of hit balls reaches a predetermined upper limit (8 [balls] in this embodiment).

When "minor win 1" to "minor win 3"("minor win pattern 1" to "minor win pattern 3") are won, a small win game state is generated. In the small winning game state, the special electric accessory 53a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the big winning hole 53.例文帳に追加
Specifically, during the occurrence of the small winning game state, a predetermined number of small winning games are executed.
In this embodiment, when "small win 1" to "small win 3" are won, the number of small win games is set to 1 [time].
Further, when "small win 1" to "small win 3" are won, the maximum opening time of the special electric role product 53a in each small win game is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 29.0 [s ]).
Then, each small winning game is (1) that the longest opening time has elapsed since the special electric role 53a was opened, and (2) to the big winning opening 53 during the execution of the small winning game. The number of game balls entered reaches a predetermined upper limit number (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]).
Further, in each small winning game, the sorting means is displaced from the non-V passing state to the V passing state. At this time, in each small-hit game, the sorting means is set to the non-V area in such a manner that it is easy (possible) for the game ball entering the big-winning opening 53 to pass through the V area during execution of the small-hit game. It is displaced from the pass state to the V pass state. As a result, when "minor win 1" to "minor win 3" are won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the minor win game state.

When passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state (when passage of the V area by the game ball entering the big winning opening 53 is detected during execution of the small winning game) , a big hit game state is generated in response to the end of the small hit game state.
At this time, when "small win 1" is won and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, the number of round games is set to 9 [times]. As a result, 10 [times] rounds are executed with the small winning game as the first round game.
On the other hand, when the "small win 2" is won and the passing of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, the number of round games is set to 6 [times]. As a result, 7 [times] rounds are executed with the small winning game as the first round game.
On the other hand, when "small win 3" is won and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, the number of round games is set to 3 [times]. As a result, 4 [times] rounds are executed with the small winning game as the first round game.
In addition, when "small hit 1" to "small hit 3" are elected, and when passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit game state, a special electric role in each round game The longest open time of the object 53a is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment).
Then, each round game is (1) that the longest opening time has passed since the special electric accessory 53a was opened, and (2) the game to the big winning opening 53 during the execution of the round game The game ends when one of the following conditions is met: that the number of hit balls reaches a predetermined upper limit (8 [balls] in this embodiment).
On the other hand, if the passing of the game ball through the V area is not detected while the small winning game state is occurring ), the jackpot gaming state is not generated.

When "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 3" are won, time saving control is started in accordance with the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, when "small win 1" to "small win 3" are won and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected while the small win game state is occurring, according to the end of the big win game state. , Time saving control is started.
In this embodiment, a plurality of time-saving end conditions (specifically, “time-saving end condition 1” to “time-saving end condition 4”) are defined as end conditions for time-saving control (hereinafter referred to as “time-saving end conditions”). It is In particular, as the time-saving end conditions, the time-saving end condition (specifically, "time-saving end condition 1" and "time-saving end condition 2") related to the variable game (the number of variable games), and "small hit" (per special figure A time saving end condition (specifically, “time saving end condition 3”) related to the result of determination) is defined. Then, after the start of the time saving control, the time saving control is ended according to the establishment of one of the time saving end conditions among "time saving end condition 1" to "time saving end condition 4".

"Time saving end condition 1" is a time saving end condition based on the variable game related to the special figure 2 game information. Concretely, the "time saving end condition 1" is a time saving end condition based on the number of fluctuation games related to the special figure 2 game information.
"Variation game based on special figure 2 game information" is a variation display of the second special symbol. In addition, the "fluctuation game based on the special figure 2 game information" may be used as the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the second special symbol.
On the other hand, "fluctuation game based on special figure 1 game information" to be described later is a fluctuation display of the first special symbol. In addition, the "fluctuation game based on the special figure 1 game information" may be used as the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the first special symbol.
In the present embodiment, the time saving end condition 1 is established by the number of time saving special figure 2 fluctuation times reaching the first time saving number of times set at the end of the big hit game state.

"Special figure 2 fluctuation frequency during time saving" is the number of fluctuation games based on the special figure 2 game information executed during time saving control.
In this embodiment, when the "time saving end condition 1" is established, at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition (when the fluctuation time has elapsed / ended), time saving Control is terminated.
In other words, if the "time saving end condition 1" is satisfied, at the start of the stop display of the second special symbol that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition (at the time of setting and starting the stop time), the time saving control is is terminated.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a first time-saving counter that counts the number of time-saving special figures 2 fluctuations. The CPU 210 sets the number of times of the first time saving according to the winning type (the type of the winning symbol) as the value of the first time saving counter at the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, every time the variable display of the second special symbol ends, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time saving counter. Then, when the value of the first time saving counter is decremented to "0", the time saving control is stopped assuming that the "time saving end condition 1" is met.

"Time saving end condition 2" is a time saving end condition based on the variable game related to the special figure 1 game information and the variable game related to the special figure 2 game information. Specifically, the "time saving end condition 2" is the number of variable games related to the special figure 1 game information and the number of variable games related to the special figure 2 game information, It is a time saving end condition based on the total number of times .
In the present embodiment, the "time saving end condition 2" is established by the time saving medium special figure total variation number reaching the second time saving number set at the end of the big hit game state.
"Time saving special figure total fluctuation number of times" is executed during time saving control, the number of fluctuation games based on the special figure 1 game information, and the number of fluctuation games based on the special figure 2 game information, the total number of times ing.
In this embodiment, when the "time saving end condition 2" is established, at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition (variation time At the time of elapse/end), the time saving control is terminated.
In other words, when the "time saving end condition 2" is satisfied, when the stop display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition is started (when the stop time is set・ At the time of start), the time saving control is terminated.
Concretely, the main control board 200 is configured with a second time saving counter for counting the number of times of time saving special figure total variation. The CPU 210 sets the second time saving frequency according to the winning type (the winning symbol type) as the value of the second time saving counter at the end of the jackpot gaming state. Also, every time the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is completed, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time saving counter. Then, when the value of the second time saving counter is decremented to "0", the time saving control is stopped assuming that the "time saving end condition 2" is satisfied.

"Time-saving end condition 3" is a time-saving end condition based on the "small hit" (the result of the special figure hit determination). Concretely, the "time-saving end condition 3" is a time-saving end condition based on the number of times the "small hit" is won (or the number of variable games related to the "small win").
In the present embodiment, the "time saving end condition 3" is established when the time saving medium and small hit fluctuation frequency reaches the third time saving frequency set at the end of the big hit game state.
"Time saving middle and small hit fluctuation frequency" has become the number of times of the small hit fluctuation game which is executed during time saving control. Here, the "small winning variation game" is a variation game that is executed when a "small winning" is won by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery).
In this embodiment, when the "time saving end condition 3" is satisfied, at the end of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol related to the "small hit" that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition (when the fluctuation time has elapsed, At the time of termination), the time saving control is terminated.
In other words, when the "time saving end condition 3" is satisfied, at the start of the stop display of the second special symbol related to the "small hit" that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition (at the time of setting and starting the stop time ), the time saving control is terminated.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a third time-saving counter that counts the number of time-saving medium-small hit variations. The CPU 210 sets a predetermined third time-saving number of times as the value of the third time-saving counter at the end of the jackpot gaming state. Also, every time the variable display of the second special symbol relating to the "small hit" is completed, "1" is subtracted from the value of the third time saving counter. Then, when the value of the third time saving counter is decremented to "0", the time saving control is stopped assuming that the "time saving end condition 3" is satisfied.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, 1 [time] is defined as the predetermined third time saving number of times. Thereby, when the "small hit" is won by the special symbol lottery (the second special symbol lottery in this embodiment) executed during the execution of the time saving control, the fluctuation display of the special symbol based on the special symbol lottery ends. In response, the time saving control is terminated.
Therefore, in the player, among the "small win 1" to "small win 3", the winning type that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, the winning type with a small number of rounds, the number of time reductions (first time reduction number and second time reduction number) In the case of winning a winning type with a small number of winning types, etc., it is possible to win a more advantageous winning type without intentionally causing the passage of the game ball through the V area during the occurrence of the small winning game state related to the winning type. It is possible to prevent a game that requires waiting.

"Time-saving end condition 4" is a condition based on winning the "jackpot" (jackpot game state).
In this embodiment, the "time saving end condition 4" is established by winning the "jackpot" (generating the jackpot gaming state).
In this embodiment, when the "time saving end condition 4" is established, the time saving control is ended at the end of the stop display of the "big hit pattern" (when the stop time elapses/ends).
In other words, when the "time saving end condition 4" is satisfied, the time saving control is ended at the start of the big hit game state (at the time of setting/starting the opening time).

In this embodiment, as the first time saving number of times and the second time saving number of times, different times are set according to the winning type (type of winning pattern), and as the third time saving number of times, winning type (type of winning design) Regardless, the same number of times is set. In addition, it does not matter as a configuration in which a different number of times is set according to the winning type (type of winning symbol) for the third time saving number of times as well.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6(a), when "jackpot 1"("jackpot pattern 1") is won, at the end of the jackpot game state, the number of first time reduction is 1 [times], Alternatively, 12 [times] is set. At this time, if the game state at the time of execution of the special figure hit determination is during the stop of the time saving control, 1 [times] is set as the first time saving number of times, and the game state at the time of the special figure hit determination is time saving control is being executed, 12 [times] is set as the number of first time saving.
In addition, when "jackpot 1"("jackpot pattern 1") is won, 5 [times] or 16 [times] is set as the second number of times of time reduction at the end of the jackpot game state. At this time, if the game state at the time of execution of the special figure hit determination is in the stop of the time saving control, 5 [times] is set as the second time saving number of times, and the game state at the time of the special figure hit determination is time saving control is being executed, 16 [times] is set as the second time saving frequency.
Furthermore, if you win the "jackpot 1"("jackpot pattern 1"), regardless of the game state at the time of execution of the special hit determination, at the end of the jackpot game state, 1 [time] as the third time reduction number ] is set.

On the other hand, when "jackpot 2"("jackpot pattern 2") is won, 100 [times] or 12 [times] is set as the first time reduction frequency at the end of the jackpot game state. At this time, if the game state at the time of execution of the special figure hit determination is during the stop of the time saving control, 100 [times] is set as the first time saving number of times, and the game state at the time of the special figure hit determination is time saving control is being executed, 12 [times] is set as the number of first time saving.
In addition, when "jackpot 2"("jackpot pattern 2") is won, 100 [times] or 16 [times] is set as the second time reduction frequency at the end of the jackpot game state. At this time, if the game state at the time of execution of the special figure hit determination is during the stop of the time saving control, 100 [times] is set as the second time saving number of times, and the game state at the time of the special figure hit determination is time saving control is being executed, 16 [times] is set as the second time saving frequency.
Furthermore, if you win the "jackpot 2"("jackpot pattern 2"), regardless of the game state when executing the special hit determination, at the end of the jackpot game state, the third time saving number of times, 1 [times ] is set.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6(b), when "jackpot 3"("jackpot pattern 3") is won, at the end of the jackpot game state regardless of the game state when the special hit determination is executed , 100 [times] is set as the number of first time saving.
Also, if you win the "jackpot 3"("jackpot pattern 3"), regardless of the game state at the time of execution of the special hit determination, at the end of the jackpot game state, the second time saving number of times is 100 [times ] is set.
Furthermore, if you win the "big hit 3"("big hit pattern 3"), regardless of the game state at the time of execution of the special hit judgment, at the end of the big hit game state, 1 [time] as the third time saving number ] is set.

On the other hand, "small win 1"("small win pattern 1") to "small win 3"("small win pattern 3") are won, and the game ball passes through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state. is detected, 12 [times] is set as the number of first time reduction at the end of the big hit game state, regardless of the game state at the time of execution of the special figure hit determination.
In addition, "small win 1"("small win pattern 1") to "small win 3"("small win pattern 3") are won, and the game ball passes through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state. is detected, 16 [times] is set as the second time saving frequency at the end of the big hit game state regardless of the game state at the time of execution of the special figure hit determination.
Furthermore, "small win 1"("small win pattern 1") to "small win 3"("small win pattern 3") are won, and the game ball passes through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state. is detected, 1 [time] is set as the third time saving frequency at the end of the big hit game state regardless of the game state at the time of execution of the special figure hit determination.
Here, in this embodiment, when the "small hit" is elected, the same number of times is used as the first time-saving number, the second time-saving number, and the third time-saving number of times, regardless of the winning type (type of winning pattern). It is configured to be set. However, when the "small hit" is won, the first time-saving number of times, the second time-saving number of times, and the third time-saving number of times may be configured to set different numbers according to the winning type (type of winning pattern). do not have.

As described above, when the big hit game state ends, the first number of times of time saving, the second number of times of time saving, and the third number of times of time saving are set, and time saving control is started according to the end of the big win game state.
Then, (1) the number of time-saving special figures 2 fluctuations has reached the first time-saving number of times set at the end of the jackpot game state ("time-saving end condition 1"), (2) the total number of time-saving special figure fluctuations Reached the second time-saving number of times set at the end of the jackpot game state ("time-saving end condition 2"), (3) the number of time-saving medium and small hit fluctuation times reached the third time-saving number of times set at the end of the jackpot game state ("time saving end condition 3") and (4) winning the "jackpot"("time saving end condition 4"), depending on the establishment of one of the time saving end conditions, the time saving control ends be done.

(Regarding control commands)
Next, control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 and control commands transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 will be described.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, the communication between the main control board 200 and the production control board 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control board 200 to the production control board 300, and the communication from the production control board 300 to the main control board 200 is Not done.
Each control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 consists of 1-byte upper data indicating the type of control command and 1-byte lower data indicating the content of the control command. there is
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the effect control board 300 by serial communication. When the effect control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300 include a symbol type designation command, a variation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, a game state designation command, a pending number designation command, and an opening designation. A command, a round start designation command, a round end designation command, an ending designation command, a V prize designation command, a first prefetch designation command, a second prefetch designation command, an error designation command, a demonstration designation command, and the like are set.
The symbol type designation command is a command for designating the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number). Specifically, the symbol type designation command includes "losing symbol", "small winning symbol"("small winning symbol 1" to "small winning symbol 3") and "big winning symbol"("big winning symbol 1" to "big winning symbol 3”), specify one type. The symbol type designation command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of special symbols. In this embodiment, the symbol type specifying command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

The variation pattern specification command is a command that specifies the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number). The variation pattern specification command specifies the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by specifying the variation pattern number. The variation pattern specification command is transmitted at the start of the variation display of the special symbols.
The stop designation command is a command for designating the stop display of special symbols (effect symbols z1, z2). The stop designation command is transmitted at the start of stop display of special symbols.
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
Here, the "game state offset value" is information specifying the game state. In this embodiment, as the gaming state offset value, a numerical value corresponding to each combination of the value of the time saving control flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, and the value of the rotation counter after the big hit is set.
The game state designation command designates one game state offset value. The game state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when changing the special game phase, which will be described later, or the like.

The pending number designation command is a command for designating the pending number. In this embodiment, the pending number designation command specifies that the pending number (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number) has increased by "1", the pending number has decreased by "1", the pending number etc. .
Here, the "special figure 1 pending number" refers to the number of notice display (fluctuation display and stop display) of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device is reserved. In addition, the "special figure 2 pending number" refers to the number of notice display (fluctuation display and stop display) of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device is reserved.
The pending number designation command is transmitted when power is turned on, when game information is stored, when variable display of special symbols is started, and the like. In this embodiment, as the reserved number designation command, those corresponding to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set.

The opening designation command is a command that designates the start of the opening period (the start of the small winning game state or the big winning game state). The opening designation command designates the type of the small winning game state or the big winning game state (type of "small winning design" or "big winning design"). Specifically, the opening designation command designates one type of "small winning design 1" to "small winning design 3" and "big winning design 1" to "big winning design 3". The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of the small winning game state or the big winning game state).
The round start specification command is a command that specifies the start of a round (small winning game or round game). The round start specification command is transmitted at the start of the round (small winning game or round game).
Round end specification command is a command that specifies the end of the round (small winning game or round game). The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of the round (small winning game or round game).
The ending designation command is a command that designates the start of the ending period. The ending specifying command is sent at the beginning of the ending period.
The V winning designation command is a command for designating passage of the game ball through the V area. The V winning designation command is transmitted when the passing of the game ball through the V area is detected.

The first look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the content of the variation mode. Specifically, the first look-ahead designation command indicates that the type of variation mode is undefined ("undefined value"), or one of m types of variation modes (variation mode number) ("variation mode m" ). The first prefetch designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.
In this embodiment, the first prefetch designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The second look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the contents of the variation pattern. Specifically, the second prefetch designation command is that the type of variation pattern is undefined ("undefined value"), or one of n types of variation patterns (variation pattern number) ("variation pattern n" ). The second prefetch designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.
In this embodiment, the second prefetch designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The error designation command is a command that designates the occurrence of various errors. In this embodiment, the error designation command designates occurrence of vibration error, magnetic error, radio wave error, or right-handed hitting error. The error designation command is sent when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demonstration designation command is a command that designates the start of the customer waiting state. The demonstration designation command is sent at the start of the customer waiting state.

The main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is bidirectional. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 consists of 1-byte data.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command to the payout control board 400 by serial communication. In the payout control board 400, when a control command is received from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Also, the payout control board 400 transmits a control command to the main control board 200 by serial communication. In the main control board 200, when a control command is received from the payout control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, as a control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400, a command for designating the number of winning balls and the like are set.
The prize number designation command is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out. In this embodiment, the number-of-prize-balls designation command designates the payout of n (n=1 to 15) prize balls. The command for specifying the number of prize balls is transmitted when the payout control board 400 executes the payout operation of the prize balls.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200 include the occurrence/cancellation of an error during payout, the occurrence/cancellation of a full tank error, the occurrence/cancellation of a jammed ball error, and the like. A control command specifying each is set. Each control command is sent upon detection of occurrence/release of various errors.

(Processing executed by main control board 200)
Next, processing executed by the main control board 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured on the main control board 200 will be described.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the random number generation circuit 203 starts the hardware random number update process.
In the hardware random number update process, each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 0.083 [μs] in this embodiment), the values of the first to third loop counters are changed within a predetermined range. (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) is updated by "1".

Further, in the hard random number update process, every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 2.666 [μs] in this embodiment), the value of the fourth loop counter falls within a predetermined range (this In the embodiment, it is updated by "1" in the range of 0 to 10006).
Then, the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery, and the reach group random number are respectively updated by the hard random number updating process. The hardware random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generation circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 transmit the control commands stored in the FIFO buffers to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400. Start control command transmission processing. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Next, game control processing executed by the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 based on the program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
(CPU initialization processing)
First, CPU initialization processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing CPU initialization processing.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 210 starts CPU initialization processing shown in FIG. The CPU initialization process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the CPU initialization processing is processing based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .
When the CPU initialization process is started, first, the process moves to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220, and settings necessary for executing various processes such as register settings are performed.

In the initial setting process, the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 are read.
Specifically, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read two times, and the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on based on the reading result of the two times. is occurring. Then, the determination result is saved as switch information for the RAM clear switch 207 . At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value (“1” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has occurred is stored as the switch information, and the ON state has occurred. If it is determined that the switch has not occurred, a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred is stored as the switch information.

Also, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is read two [times], and based on the reading result of the two [times], the ON state is generated for the setting key switch 208. Determine whether or not Then, the determination result is saved as switch information of the setting key switch 208 . At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value (“1” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has occurred is stored as the switch information, and the ON state has occurred. If it is determined that the switch has not occurred, a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred is stored as the switch information.
Furthermore, reading the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the inner frame open sensor 108 is executed 2 [times], and based on the reading result of the 2 [times], the inner frame open sensor 108 is turned on. is occurring. When it is determined that the ON state has not occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, wait processing time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 [s] in this embodiment) is set in the timer counter. As a result, measurement of the set wait processing time by the timer counter is started.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether or not the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has passed. If it is determined that the wait processing time has passed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4, If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the process of step S1-3 is repeated.

In step S1-4, RAM access permission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, necessary processes are executed to permit access to the work area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to access permission is stored as a RAM protection value in the RAM access protection area of the RAM 230 . As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is permitted.

At step S1-5, a gaming machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is saved (loaded) in the D register.
At step S1-6, it is determined whether or not the backup valid flag is normal. If it is determined that it is not (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, when the value (backup valid flag) stored in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 is a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal, and the value stored in the backup valid flag area is not a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal.

In step S1-7, checksum calculation processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the use area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
Next, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-use area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal, and if it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-9, If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1 The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in -7 must match the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area." Judge that the checksum is normal.
On the other hand, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1- The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in step 7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area." If not, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-9, a clear target area setting process at power-on is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-10. In the power-on clear target area setting process, as a range to clear (initialize) the use area M1 of the RAM 230, areas other than the setting value area and the gaming machine state flag area (specifically, the checksum area, Backup valid flag area, error related area, normal game related area 1, normal game related area 2, and stack area) are set.
At step S1-10, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on. If it is determined that the ON state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is stored as switch information, it is determined that an ON state has occurred, and a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored. If so, it is determined that the ON state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-12, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register, it is determined whether or not the game ready state has occurred. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-13, and the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
The "setting confirmation condition" is that a game-enabled state has occurred, the RAM clear switch 207 has not been turned on, the setting key switch 208 has been turned on, and This is established when the frame open sensor 108 is in the ON state.
Here, in step S1-1, if the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the ON state is not generated. As a result, when both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 are in the on state, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is in the on state is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. . On the other hand, if at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is not turned on is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. be done.
Therefore, in step 1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is stored as switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is met, and a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored. If so, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-13, a setting confirmation state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the setting confirmation state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting value confirmation state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, a process for setting an area to be cleared upon power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the clear target area setting process at the time of power return, as the range to clear (initialize) the use area M1 of the RAM 230, the set value area, the gaming machine state flag area, the normal game related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area Areas (specifically, checksum area, backup valid flag area, error-related area, and normal game-related area 1) are set.
In step S1-15, an initialization process at the time of power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the power recovery initialization process, the range set in step S1-14 is cleared (initialized) in the use area M1 of the RAM 230. FIG.
In step S1-16, a subcommand transmission process at power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the power recovery subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (power recovery designation command) designating recovery from power shutdown is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
In step S1-17, a payout command transmission process at power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process at the time of power recovery, a payout command designating recovery from power shutdown is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S1-18, a backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, a non-use area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the non-use area read/write check process, the non-use area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is performed.
In step S1-20, a process for setting an area to be cleared in the event of an abnormality is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-21. In the abnormality clear target area setting process, all areas (specifically, the set value area, the gaming machine status flag area, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area).
In step S1-21, a used area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-22. In the used area read/write check process, the range set in step S1-20 in the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and the read/write check is performed.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether or not the result of the read/write check performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 is normal. If it is determined that the result of the read/write check is not normal (No), , the process proceeds to step S1-23, and when it is determined that the result of the read/write check is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, RAM abnormality setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-24, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-25, and the setting is performed. If it is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-26.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred. At this time, if the game machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred. Determine that no confirmation condition has occurred.
At step S1-25, a playable state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-26. In the playable state setting process, a value corresponding to the playable state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied.If it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-27, and the setting change condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (No), the process proceeds to step S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is that the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on, the setting key switch 208 is turned on, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is turned on. holds when
Here, as described above, when both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 are in the ON state, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 indicates that the ON state has occurred. Value is saved. On the other hand, if at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is not turned on is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. be done.
Therefore, in step 1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. .
At this time, if both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 store a value indicating that the ON state has occurred, the setting change condition is satisfied. I judge. On the other hand, if at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 stores a value indicating that the ON state has not occurred, the setting change condition is satisfied. determine that it is not.

In step S1-27, a setting change state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
At step S1-28, a gaming machine state flag saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-29. In the gaming machine status flag saving process, the gaming machine status flag set in the D register is saved in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 .
At step S1-29, a RAM clearing subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-30. In the RAM clearing subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (RAM clearing designation command) designating that RAM clearing has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
At step S1-30, the RAM clear initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-31. In the RAM clearing initialization process, the range set in step S1-9 or step S1-20 in the use area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-31, a payout command transmission process when RAM is cleared is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process at the time of RAM clearing, a payout command specifying that the RAM clearing has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S1-32, a subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-33. In the subcommand setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command designating the current gaming machine state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the sub-command setting process, a sub-command output request of the RAM 230 outputs a power-on gaming machine state specifying command that specifies the gaming machine state flag (gaming machine state) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 . Store in buffer.
In step S1-33, a subcommand group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-34. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 .
Here, the sub-command group includes a sub-command for specifying the power recovery phase, a sub-command for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a sub-command for specifying the firing position, and a stop symbol of the first special symbol. Subcommand to specify the stop symbol of the second special symbol, subcommand to specify the special figure 1 reserved number, subcommand to specify the special figure 2 reserved number, subcommand to specify the value of the time saving counter, RAM230 includes a setting value designation command for designating the setting value stored in the setting value area of .

At step S1-34, an initial display time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in the initial display timer.
At step S1-35, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, initial setting of a CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is performed.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, an interrupt vector register is set, and an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(main loop processing)
Next, main loop processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing main loop processing.
After completing the CPU initialization process (step S1-35) shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. The main loop processing is processing based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop processing is processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .
When the main loop process is started, first, the process moves to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, the "initial value random number" is a random number for determining the initial value and end value of soft random numbers (hitting pattern random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, etc.) that are random numbers generated on the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates soft random numbers is updated within a preset range from the initial value to the end value. The initial value and end value of the loop counter that generates soft random numbers are changed each time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

At step S2-3, main command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the payout control board 400 (control command transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200) is analyzed, and a process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, subcommand transmission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the effect control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
At step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is released. As a result, during the period from the execution of the interrupt permission process of step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibition process of step S2-1, the execution of the saving process at power shutdown, the timer interrupt process, etc. is permitted. This is the interrupt enabled period.
In step S2-6, another random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In other random number update processing, software random numbers excluding the hit pattern random numbers (specifically, variation pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Save processing when power is cut off)
Next, the power-off save process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the saving process at power-off.
The main control board 200 includes a power cutoff detection circuit (not shown). The power cutoff detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply substrate 600 and outputs a power cutoff notice signal to the input port 204 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
When the CPU 210 receives the power-off notice signal, the CPU 210 starts the power-off saving process shown in FIG. 33 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. The power-off save process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the saving process at power-off is a process based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .

When the power-off saving process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register saving process, the values of the registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in the save area of the RAM 230 .
In step S3-2, power-off warning signal reading processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cut-off notice signal reading process, the power cut-off notice signal is read from the power cut-off detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power-off notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power-off notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cut-off notice signal), whether the power cut-off notice signal is input from the power cut-off detection circuit. If it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and if it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has not been input (No), goes to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, output port stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop processing, output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped.
Specifically, in the output port stop processing, the values of all bits included in the port registers of the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) are initialized. This stops the output of control signals and control commands from the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4).
In step S3-5, a backup effective flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is stored (saved) in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 .

In step S3-6, checksum storage processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the checksum saving process, a checksum is calculated and saved.
Specifically, in the checksum storage process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the use area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 . Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230 .
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230. FIG. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, RAM access prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition processing, processing for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to access prohibition is stored as a RAM protection value in the RAM access protection area of the RAM 230 . As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

At step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of power-off notice signal reading times is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-9, power-off warning signal reading processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cut-off notice signal reading process, the power cut-off notice signal is read from the power cut-off detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power-off notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power-off notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cut-off notice signal), is the power cut-off notice signal input from the power cut-off detection circuit? If it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and if it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has been input (Yes). goes to step S3-8.

At step S3-11, a loop counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12. In the loop counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is "0". If it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is "0" (Yes), the CPU When it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, a register return process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the original process is returned to. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S3-1 is restored. After completion of the register return processing, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(timer interrupt processing)
Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The clock generation circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt period (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
In response to the generation of the interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 34 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop processing. The main loop processing is processing based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop processing is processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the process moves to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in the save area of the RAM 230 .
In step S4-2, interrupt permission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission processing, interrupts are permitted.
In step S4-3, dynamic port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. Dynamic port output processing will be described later.

In step S4-4, port input processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In port input processing, the state of each switch sensor (each signal) is obtained.
The RAM 230 has an input information storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (each signal input to the input port 204) connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), and an input information storage area corresponding to the input port 204 (input and an ON state storage area corresponding to each switch sensor (each signal input to input port 204) connected to port 0 to input port 3).
In the port input process, first, for each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), information set in the reception storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor is obtained, The acquired information is saved (stored) in the input information storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor.
As a result, for each switch/sensor, when the detection signal from the switch/sensor is input (high level), "1" is stored in the input information storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor. When the detection signal from the switch sensor is not input (low level), "0" is stored in the input storage area corresponding to the switch sensor.

Next, it is determined whether or not each switch sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3) is turned on. At this time, for each switch sensor, the ON state is determined based on the value saved in the input information storage area in the previous port input process and the value saved in the input information storage area in the current port input process. Determine whether or not it has occurred.
The “on state” refers to a state in which a state (low level) in which no detection signal is input has changed to a state (high level) in which a detection signal is input.
When it is determined that each switch/sensor is in the ON state, "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state has not occurred for each switch/sensor, "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the ON state storage area corresponding to each switch sensor is referred to as "switch bit data" of the switch sensor.
In particular, the input port 1 is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal input from the firing enable condition detection section 422 . In the port input process, the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to the steering wheel detection signal of input port 1 is acquired, and the acquired information is stored in the input information storage area corresponding to the steering wheel detection signal. ) is done.

At step S4-5, a gaming machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-7, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-9.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag obtained in step S4-5, it is determined whether or not the game ready state has occurred. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has been generated, and if it is not a value corresponding to the playable state, the gameable state is generated. determine that it is not.

In step S4-7, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that an abnormal state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-8, and the abnormal state is If it is determined that it has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-19.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred. At this time, if the obtained gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to any one of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. If the obtained gaming machine state flag does not correspond to any one of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that the abnormal state has not occurred.

In step S4-8, setting-related processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. The setting-related processing will be described later.
In step S4-9, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, in the timer update process, the value of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.) is updated.
At step S4-10, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. The initial value random number update process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, a hit symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the winning symbol random number among the soft random numbers is updated.
In step S4-12, switch management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the switch management processing, processing (acquisition of various random numbers, etc.) is executed according to the state of each switch 101, 102, 104, 110 (whether or not an ON state is detected). The switch management processing will be described later.

At step S4-13, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special figure display device and the operation of the special electric accessory 53a are managed. Special game management processing will be described later.
In step S4-14, normal game management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. The normal game management process manages the operation of the normal diagram display device and the operation of the normal electric accessory 52a. The normal game management process will be described later.

At step S4-15, a state management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. The state management process monitors the occurrence and release of various errors (abnormal states). Then, various settings (setting of subcommands, etc.) are executed at the time of detection of occurrence/cancellation of various errors.
In addition, in the state management process, based on the values saved in the input information storage area corresponding to the steering wheel detection signal (the value saved in the previous timer interrupt process and the value saved in the current timer interrupt process) Then, it is determined whether or not the state in which the steering wheel detection signal is not input has changed to the state in which it is input. When it is determined that the steering wheel detection signal is changed from the non-input state to the input state, a game situation designating command for designating the generation of a shooting ready state is stored in a sub-command output request buffer of a RAM 230. - 特許庁
Furthermore, in the state management process, based on the values saved in the input information storage area corresponding to the steering wheel detection signal (the value saved in the previous timer interrupt process and the value saved in the current timer interrupt process) Then, it is determined whether or not the state in which the steering wheel detection signal is being input has changed to the state in which it is not being input. When it is determined that the handle detection signal is changed from the input state to the non-input state, a game situation designation command for designating cancellation of the firing ready state is stored in a sub-command output request buffer of a RAM 230. - 特許庁

At step S4-16, a winning opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the prize-winning switch process, processes (such as updating various counters) are executed according to the states of the switches 101 to 104 and 106 (whether or not the ON state is detected).
In this embodiment, as prize ball control counters, a prize ball control counter 1 that stores the number of ball game balls entering the first starting hole 51 and the number of ball game balls entering the second starting hole 52 are stored. a prize ball control counter 2 that stores the number of ball game balls entering the big winning hole 53; and a prize ball control counter that stores the number of ball game balls entering the operating hole 54. A counter 4 and a prize ball control counter 5 for storing the number of ball game balls entered into other prize winning holes 55a to 55e are set.
In the prize winning opening switch process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of each switch 101 to 104, 106 is detected. Add "1" to the value.

In step S4-17, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
Specifically, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 4 [balls]) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . Thereafter, when the game ball payout device 440 completes the payout of the prize balls, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command designating the completion of the payout to the main control board 200 . Then, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in accordance with the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is equal to or greater than "1", a payout command specifying payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to receiving the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is equal to or greater than "1", it generates a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (14 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is equal to or greater than "1", it generates a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in accordance with the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is equal to or greater than "1", it generates a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (10 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

In step S4-18, a firing position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the firing position designation management process, processing related to designation of the firing position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when changing from a left-handed state (a state in which the game ball is launched to the left path) to a right-handed state (a state in which the game ball is launched to the right path) , "1" is set in the shooting position specifying flag area of the RAM 230, and a subcommand specifying launching of the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is transmitted to the effect control board 300 .
On the other hand, when changing from the right-handed state to the left-handed state (at the end of the time-saving control, etc.), "0" is set in the shooting position specification flag area of the RAM 230, and the launch of the game ball to the left path is specified. The subcommand is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 . As a result, a subcommand specifying launching of the game ball to the left path is transmitted to the effect control board 300 .

At step S4-19, an external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In the present embodiment, the external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (an electronic device such as a hall computer, a data display device, etc.) includes information on the number of pattern determinations, starting gate information, jackpot information, security information, and an out gate. Payout number information, error occurrence information, etc. are defined.
The "symbol determination frequency information" is external information regarding the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation display and stop display of special symbols). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol determination frequency information to the hall computer (or the data display device) every time the number of executions of the stop display of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number.
The “starting opening information” is external information regarding entry of game balls into the starting openings 51 and 52 . The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the starting port information to the hall computer (or data display device) each time the ON state of the detection signal input from the starting port switches 101 and 102 is detected.

The "jackpot information" is external information about the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. The main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer (or data display device) each time a jackpot game state is generated.
The "outlet payout information" is external information regarding the number of game balls ejected from the ejection path (or the number of game balls ejected from the outlet 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the out-out slot payout number information to the hall computer each time the value of the out-ball number counter for external information reaches a predetermined value.
"Security information" is external information indicating that a setting change state is occurring, a setting confirmation state is occurring, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hole computer when the value of the security timer is "1" or more.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information determination counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information fixed number counter has reached a predetermined value, the pattern fixed number information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information fixed number counter. As a result, pattern determination frequency information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry number counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [time] in the present embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the external information starting hole entry number counter has reached a predetermined value, the starting hole information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . After that, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the external information starting entrance number of times counter. As a result, starting point information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

Also, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information jackpot frequency counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information jackpot frequency counter has reached a predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . Thereafter, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information jackpot number counter. As a result, jackpot information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information out-ball number counter has reached a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information out ball number counter has reached a predetermined value, the out outlet payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . Thereafter, a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information out-ball number counter. As a result, out-port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

Also, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the game ready status.
Then, it is determined that the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is not a value corresponding to the game ready state (setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting error state, RAM error state, or backup error state). value), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hole computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the security timer is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the security timer is equal to or greater than "1", the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. FIG. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hole computer.

At step S4-20, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits). It is
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized), and the common 3 output request buffer is cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer is set to "0", and each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer is set to "0".

Next, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained.
Then, when the obtained gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the game ready state, the normal display data setting process described later is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the setting change state, a display data setting process at the time of setting change, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, a display data setting process at the time of setting confirmation, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), an abnormality display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special figure 1 display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display pattern counter obtained is transferred to the common 0 output request buffer. set.
As a result, the first special symbol is displayed by the LED1 to LED8 among the light emitting elements forming the main display device 60. FIG.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 display pattern counter is acquired, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the value of the acquired special figure 2 display pattern counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, the second special symbol is displayed by the LEDs 9 to 16 among the light emitting elements forming the main display device 60 .
Next, the value of the general-purpose map display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value of the general-purpose map display symbol counter is set as the output data a.

Next, the values set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 are the "state before opening the first large winning opening", the "control state for opening the first large winning opening", and the "effective state for closing the first large winning opening". , ``waiting state for ending the opening of the 1st major winning prize'', ``state before opening the 2nd major winning prize'', ``control state for opening the 2nd major winning It is determined whether or not the value designates one of the special game phases in the winning opening opening end wait state.
Then, the value set in the special game phase flag area is "pre-opening state of the first large winning opening", "control state of opening the first large winning opening", "effective state of closing the first large winning opening", and "first large winning opening closed state". 1st Grand Prize Opening End Wait State, ``Second Grand Prize Opening Pre-Open State'', ``Second Grand Prize Opening Control State'', ``Second Grand Prize Opening Closed Effective State'', and ``Second Grand Prize Opening Opened'' When it is determined that it is a value that specifies one of the special game phases in the "end wait state", the value set in the special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230 (type of "small hit symbol" or "big hit symbol" ) is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as the output data b.
On the other hand, the values set in the special game phase flag area are "pre-opening state of the first large winning opening", "control state of opening the first large winning opening", "effective state of closing the first large winning opening", and "first large winning opening closed state". 1st Grand Prize Opening End Wait State, ``Second Grand Prize Opening Pre-Open State'', ``Second Grand Prize Opening Control State'', ``Second Grand Prize Opening Closed Effective State'', and ``Second Grand Prize Opening Opened'' When it is determined that it is not a value specifying any of the special game phases in the end wait state, the output data b is not set.
Next, the value set in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data c.

Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by ORing the output data a to output data c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, the normal symbols are displayed by the LEDs 17 and 18 among the light-emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, and the number of round games executed during the big win game state by the LEDs 19 to 23 (type of the big win game state). is displayed, and the LED 24 displays the path (left path or right path) along which the game ball should be launched.
Next, the value of the special figure 1 pending number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data d.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data e.
Next, the value of the normal figure reservation number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data f.
Next, it is determined whether or not the power supply is restored.
And when it determines with it being the power return time, the value set to the time saving control flag area|region is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value are set as the output data g.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is not restored, the output data g is not set.
Next, the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data h.
Next, display data (8 bits) obtained by ORing output data d to output data h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements that constitute the main display device 60, LEDs 25 and 26 display the number of reserved special figures 1, LEDs 27 and 28 display the number of reserved special figures 2, and LEDs 29 and 30 display the number of reserved special figures. The number of reservations is displayed, and the LED 31 displays the game state at the time of power return (during the occurrence of the normal high probability state or the occurrence of the normal low probability state), and the LED 32 indicates the current game state (execution of time saving control in progress or stopped) is displayed.

In the setting change display data setting process, information indicating that a setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and the settings stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are set. Information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and "-" is set. is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the character "r", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the character "n.", and the LEDs 49 to 56 display the character ""-" is displayed, and the numbers indicating the set values are displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64.

In the setting confirmation display data setting process, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and the setting stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is set. Information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "r" (8 bits) is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data of "n." (8 bits) is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the RAM 230 is set. The display data corresponding to the set value stored in the value area is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (clear value remains).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the character "r", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the character "n." A number indicating the value is displayed. Note that the LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In the abnormal display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer. At the same time, an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "E" (8 bits) is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data of "r." (8 bits) is set in the common 1 output request buffer, Display data (error code) corresponding to the state (setting error state, RAM error state, or backup error state) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (clear value remains).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the character "E", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the character "r.", and the LEDs 57 to 64 display the error A number representing the code is displayed. Note that the LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

At step S4-21, a solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, control data (driving data) to be output to each solenoid 64 , 65 a , 65 b , 66 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of RAM 230 .
In step S4-22, port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer, solenoids 64, 65a, 65b, 66 and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signal, control signal, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output ports 205 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer. Further, each solenoid 64 to 66 is driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-24. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S4-24, test signal output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is a process based on a program for executing a test-related process defined by gaming machine regulations. That is, the test signal output processing is processing based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220 . The test signal tube is invoked during execution of timer interrupt processing.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, test information (test signal) indicating an internal state (jackpot game state, time saving control execution state, etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
In step S4-25, performance display device control processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-26. The performance display device control processing will be described later.
In step S4-26, a register return process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the original process is returned to. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S4-1 is restored. After completion of the register return processing, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output processing in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing dynamic port output processing.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, as shown in FIG. 35, the process first proceeds to step S29-1.
In step S29-1, output data clear processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-2. In the output data clear process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, "0" is set as each bit value of the A register.
In step S29-2, main display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 0. FIG. As a result, the output port 0 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 becomes low level.

In step S29-3, performance display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to the output port 4. FIG. As a result, the output port 4 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the performance display device 206 becomes low level.
In step S29-4, common selection processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether or not the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit (“3” in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit value, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the common counter.

In step S29-5, common output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-6.
In common output processing, output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to output port 1 .
That is, when the value of the common counter is "0", output data is output to the output port 1 with "COM0" set to high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" set to low level. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM1” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM2”, and “COM3” set to low level. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM2” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM1”, and “COM3” set to low level. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM3” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM1” and “COM2” set to low level. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".

Also, in the common output process, the output data of the launch permission signal is output to the output port 1 .
That is, first, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set).
Then, when it is determined that the game ready state has occurred, it outputs to the output port 1 output data for setting the launch permission signal to a high level. As a result, a launch enable signal is output.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the playable state has not occurred, it outputs to the output port 1 the output data that sets the launch permission signal to a low level. This stops the output of the launch permission signal.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the game ready status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.
In the present embodiment, the output of the launch permission signal is set only when it is determined in the common output process that the game ready state has occurred. As a result, the launch permission signal is output only while the game ready state is occurring (during setting). However, in the common output process, regardless of the state of the gaming machine, the output of the launch permission signal may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to have a configuration in which the firing enable signal is always output while the main control board 200 is powered on.

In step S29-6, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-7, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S29-11.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the game ready status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.

In step S29-7, main display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, display data for the main display device 60 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, among the common 0 to common 3 output request buffers of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. set.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is the common The display data are set in the 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer.

In step S29-8, main display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to output port 0. FIG.
As a result, the data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver. 250a.
That is, the display on the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-10. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S29-10, performance display device output processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. Performance display device output processing will be described later.

In step S29-11, performance display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, among the common 0 to common 3 output request buffers of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. set.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the LED display setting process of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process (specifically, the display data setting process at the time of setting change, setting confirmation In the time display data setting process or the abnormal time display data setting process), it becomes the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer.

In step S29-12, performance display device data output processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-11 is output to the output port 4. FIG.
As a result, the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver. 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing performance display device output processing.
Performance display device output processing is processing based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 . That is, the performance display device output processing is processing based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220 . Performance display device output processing is called during execution of dynamic port output processing.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, as shown in FIG. 36, the process first proceeds to step S30-1.
In step S30-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the register saving process, the values of all the registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to the saving area of the RAM. Also, the values of all stack pointers used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved in the save area of the RAM.

In step S30-2, performance display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, the display data set in the area corresponding to the value of the confirmed common counter is acquired from the identification segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer of the RAM 230, and the acquired display data is set in the A register. .
At this time, when the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the high-order 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the high-order 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is set in the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control processing of step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt processing. displayed data.

In step S30-3, performance display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S30-2 is output to the output port 4. FIG.
As a result, data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, register restoration processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S30-1 (the value of the register used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the The value of the saved stack pointer (the value of the stack pointer used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.
In step S30-5, interrupt permission processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is released. As a result, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Setting-related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, as shown in FIG. 37, the process first proceeds to step S37-1.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether or not the setting change state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the setting change state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2, and the setting If it is determined that no change state has occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S37-8.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the setting change status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has occurred. Determine that no change state has occurred.

In step S37-2, set value acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the setting value acquisition process, the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are acquired (loaded) and the acquired setting values are stored in the register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4, and the RAM clear switch is pressed. 207 is not pressed (No), the process proceeds to step S37-5.
Here, if the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if it is not turned on, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed. judge.
In step S37-4, set value update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the set value update process, "1" is added to the set value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the register is less than a predetermined set comparison value ("6" in this embodiment). is not less than the set comparison value (the set value is equal to or greater than the predetermined set comparison value) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-6, and the set value stored in the register is compared with the predetermined set comparison value. If it is determined to be less than the value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, set value initialization processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-7. In the setting value initialization process, the setting value stored in the register is overwritten with a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment).
In step S37-7, set value saving processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-8. In the setting value saving process, the setting values stored in the register are saved in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .

In step S37-8, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (it is in the OFF state), If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is ON (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). .
If the setting key switch 208 is turned on, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is turned on. If the setting key switch 208 is not turned on, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is turned on. It is determined that it is not.
In step S37-9, a subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-10. In the subcommand setting process, a setting-related end specifying command (subcommand) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S37-10, a subcommand group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-11. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 .
Here, the subcommand group includes a subcommand that specifies the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand that specifies the firing position, a subcommand that specifies the stop symbol of the first special symbol, and a stop symbol of the second special symbol. Subcommand to specify the pattern, subcommand to specify the special figure 1 reservation number, subcommand to specify the special figure 2 reservation number, subcommand to specify the value of the time saving counter, setting stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 It includes setting value specification commands for specifying values.
At step S37-11, the RAM set process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the next process (step S4-19) is performed. In the RAM set process, a playable state is set as the gaming machine state.
Specifically, a value corresponding to the playable state is stored (saved) as a value (gaming machine state flag) in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 .

(switch management processing)
Next, the switch management processing of step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing switch management processing.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, as shown in FIG. 38, the process first proceeds to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the operating port switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the operating port switch 104 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2. If it is determined that the ON state of the operating port switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, normal chart starting ball detection processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. Normal figure starting ball detection processing will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting opening switch 101 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting opening switch 101 is detected (Yes), step When the process proceeds to S5-4 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, a special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special figure 1 starting ball detection processing will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starter switch 102 is detected, and if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 starter switch 102 is detected (Yes), step When the process proceeds to S5-6 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-7.
In step S5-6, a special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-7. The special figure 2 starting ball detection processing will be described later.

In step S5-7, it is determined whether or not the ON state of V-region switch 110 has been detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of V-region switch 110 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-8. If it is determined that the ON state of the V-region switch 110 has not been detected (No), the series of processing ends and the next processing (step S4-13) is performed.
In step S5-8, V passage detection processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-13) is performed.
In the V passage detection process, first, it is determined whether or not it is during the V valid period.
The "V valid period" is a period from the start of the first round (small winning game) until the valid time (interval time) for closing the big winning opening after the end of the first round elapses.
Then, when it is determined that it is during the V valid period, "1" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, and the V winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the V valid period, the process ends and the next process (step S4-13) is performed.
In this embodiment, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening open control state" or the "first big winning opening closed valid state". If it is, it is determined that it is in the V winning valid period, and if it is a value corresponding to another special game phase, it is determined that it is not in the V winning valid period.

(normal figure starting ball detection processing)
Next, normal figure starting ball detection processing in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing normal/normal starting ball detection processing.
When the normal chart starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 39, the process first proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, normal figure random number acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the general pattern random number acquisition process, the winning random number (random value) is acquired (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern reservation number counter is the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment), and if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern reservation number counter is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3, and if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern pending number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5- 3).
In step S6-3, normal figure pending number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the general pattern reservation number counter update process, the value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the general pattern reservation number counter is newly set to the general pattern reservation number counter.

In step S6-4, the general pattern random number storage process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the general pattern random number storage process, the hit random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the general pattern game information storage area of the RAM 230 as general pattern game information.
The RAM 230 includes a storage area 0 for storing general pattern game information during execution of a game, and a general pattern game information storage area for storing general pattern game information for which normal pattern hit/loss determination is suspended. It is
The general pattern game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing general pattern game information.
The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower) in descending order of priority. Then, the general-purpose game information stored in the general-purpose game information storage area is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area with the higher priority order.

In the general pattern random number storage process, the hit random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the general pattern game information storage area as the general pattern game information. At this time, the general pattern game information is stored in the storage area with the highest priority among the vacant storage areas.
That is, when the current general pattern pending number counter value = "1", the hit random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 1. If the current general pattern pending number counter value = "2", the random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 2. If the current general pattern pending number counter value = "3", the random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 3. If the current general pattern pending number counter value = "4", the random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 4.

(Special figure 1 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, as shown in FIG. 40, the process first proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry count counter.
In step S7-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the pending number counter address setting process, in the pending number counter address setting area of the RAM 230, the address of the special figure 1 pending number counter is set.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special figure 2 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process of step S5-6 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, as shown in FIG. 41, the process first proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 . In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry count counter.
In step S8-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the pending number counter address setting process, in the pending number counter address area of the RAM 230, the address of the special figure 2 pending number counter is set.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-7). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special symbol random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process of steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 42, the process first proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special figure pending number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special figure reservation number acquisition process, the value of the special figure reservation number counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter or special figure 2 reservation number counter) specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area (special figure 1 reservation Get (load) the number or special figure 2 pending number).

In step S9-3, a special random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random numbers) such as jackpot random numbers, winning pattern random numbers, reach group random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers are acquired (loaded) from loop counters corresponding to each lottery. At this time, a corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) acquired in step S9-2 is the upper limit, and the special figure reservation number is not the upper limit If it is determined (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5, and if it is determined that the special figure reservation number is the upper limit (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5 -5, S5-7).
In this embodiment, "4" is defined as the upper limit of the number of special figures 1 reserved. On the other hand, "1" is defined as the upper limit value of the special figure 2 reservation number. In addition, as the upper limit value of the special figure 2 reservation number, "4" may be defined.
In step S9-5, a special figure pending number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special figure pending number counter update process, the value set in the special figure pending number counter (special figure 1 pending number counter or special figure 2 pending number counter) specified by the address set in the pending number counter address area The value obtained by adding "1" to is newly set to the special figure pending number counter.

In step S9-6, a special random number saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure random number storage process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game Information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area).
The RAM 230 includes a storage area 0 for storing special figure game information during execution of a game, a special figure 1 game information storage area for storing special figure 1 game information for which start determination is suspended, and a start determination for suspension. It is configured including a special figure 2 game information storage area.
The special figure 1 game information storage area is configured including a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the special figure 1 game information.
The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower) in descending order of priority. Then, for the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area, starting determination is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area with the higher priority.
The special figure 2 game information storage area is configured including a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the special figure 2 game information.
The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower) in descending order of priority. Then, the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area is subjected to starting determination in order from the one stored in the storage area with the higher priority.

In the special figure random number storage process, if the special symbol identification value obtained in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are used as special figure 1 game information. , is stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the memory area with the highest priority among the free memory areas.
That is, when the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "1", various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1. If the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 2. If the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "3", various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3. If the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 4.
On the other hand, if the special symbol identification value obtained in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 as special figure 2 game information, special figure 2 game Store in the information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the memory area with the highest priority among the free memory areas.
That is, when the value of the current special figure 2 pending number counter = "1", various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1. If the value of the current special figure 2 pending number counter = "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 2. If the value of the current special figure 2 pending number counter = "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3. If the value of the current special figure 2 pending number counter = "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 4.

In step S9-7, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the pending number designation command setting process, a pending number designation command specifying that the special figure pending number (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number) has increased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 do. At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the reserved number designation command specifying that the special figure 1 reserved number has increased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230, and if the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, a reservation number designation command that specifies that the special figure 2 reservation number has increased by "1", RAM 230 subcommand output request buffer.

In step S9-8, a preliminary determination process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5 or S5-7). In the prior determination process, the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure) saved (stored) in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) in step S9-6 2 game information) (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determined game information"), various lottery results are pre-determined.
In this embodiment, for all game information (special figure 1 game information and special figure 2 game information), prior determination of various lottery results is performed.
In addition, regarding the game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, the prior determination of various lottery results may not be performed. In addition, for the special figure 2 game information acquired (stored) while the time saving control is stopped, the pre-determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the special figure 1 game information acquired (stored) during the execution of the time saving control , may be configured such that the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed.

In the prior determination process, first, the prior special figure per determination process is executed.
In the preliminary special figure hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery ("big hit", "small hit" or "loss") is determined (preliminary special figure hit determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol big winning lottery table in which the big winning values of the special symbol lottery are registered and a special symbol small winning lottery table in which the small winning values of the special symbol lottery are registered.
In the preliminary special figure hit determination process, first, the preliminary special figure big hit determination process is executed.
In advance special figure big hit decision processing, the special figure big hit lottery table is read. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the game information to be pre-determined and the read-out special jackpot lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "jackpot" is won (preliminary special jackpot determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determination target game information matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has been won (special pattern lottery The result is judged as a “jackpot”). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the game information to be pre-determined does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has not been won.
When it is determined that the "big hit" is not won by the preliminary special figure big hit determination process, next, the preliminary special figure small hit determination process is executed.
In the advance special figure small hit determination processing, the special figure small hit lottery table is read. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the game information to be pre-determined and the read-out special-figure small-hit lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "small-hit" is won (advance special-figure small-hit determination). .
At this time, if the big hit random number included in the pre-determination target game information matches the small hit value registered in the special small hit lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has been won (special The result of the pattern lottery is determined as a "small hit"). On the other hand, when the big hit random number included in the game information to be pre-determined does not match the small hit value registered in the special small prize lottery table, it is determined that the "small prize" has not been won.
When it is determined that the "small hit" is not won by the preliminary special figure small hit determination processing, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "loss".
At this time, as described above, if the holding type of the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 1 game information, one of the "big hit" and "loss" is determined (the "small hit" is determined never).
On the other hand, when the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 2 game information, one of "big hit", "small hit" and "loss" is determined.

In advance determination processing, next, advance special symbol design determination processing is executed. In the prior special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (preliminary special symbol determination).
In the prior special symbol determination process, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by preliminary special symbol determination, the type of "big hit symbol" is determined (preliminary special symbol determination).
The ROM 220 stores a jackpot symbol lottery table in which correspondence between a jackpot symbol random number and a type of "big hit symbol" is registered. Also, as the jackpot symbol lottery tables, a first jackpot pattern lottery table corresponding to the special figure 1 game information and a second jackpot pattern lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 game information are stored.
In the first big-hit symbol lottery table, "big-hit symbol 1" and "big-hit symbol 2" are registered as types of the "big-hit symbol". On the other hand, in the second big-hit symbol lottery table, only "big-hit symbol 3" is registered as the type of the "big-hit symbol".
Then, in the process of determining the type of "big hit symbol", when the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 1 game information, the first big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read first big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
On the other hand, when the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 2 game information, the second big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read second big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.

On the other hand, in the prior special symbol determination process, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by prior special symbol determination, the type of "small hit design" is determined (preliminary special symbol determination).
A ROM 220 stores a small winning symbol lottery table in which correspondence between winning symbol random numbers and types of "small winning symbols"("small winning symbol 1" to "small winning symbol 3") is registered.
Then, in the process of determining the type of "small winning design", the small winning design lottery table is read. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read small winning symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the preliminary special figure design determination process, when it is determined as "lost" (defeated) by preliminary special figure hit determination, "lost design" is determined as the type of stop design (preliminary special figure design determination).

In advance determination processing, next, advance variation pattern table type determination processing is executed. In the prior variation pattern table type determination processing, the variation pattern table type is determined (prior variation pattern table type determination).
The ROM 220 contains the last winning symbol, the reservation type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) of the preliminary determination target game information (start determination target game information), the value of the first time reduction counter, the value of the second time reduction counter , The value of the first special variation counter, the value of the second special variation counter, the combination of the number of special figures 1 reserved, the number of special figures 2 reserved, etc., and the variation pattern table type The correspondence between the variation pattern table type determination is registered table is stored.
In the prior variation pattern table type determination processing, first, the variation pattern table type determination table is read. In addition, the last winning pattern, the reservation type of the game information targeted for pre-determination (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the value of the first time saving counter, the value of the second time saving counter, the value of the first special variation counter, Check the information such as the value of the second special variation counter, the number of special figures 1 reserved, the number of special figures 2 reserved. Then, the variation pattern table type determination table is referenced to acquire the variation pattern table type corresponding to the confirmed information.

In advance determination processing, next, advance special figure variation mode determination processing is executed.
In the prior special figure variation mode determination process, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) are determined (previous variation mode determination).
In the pre-special figure variation mode determination process, if it is determined as "big hit" or "small hit" by the pre-special figure hit determination, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and , and a variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) are determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be "missing" by the preliminary special figure hit determination, the variation mode number (variation mode type), the variation pattern number (variation pattern type), and the is determined.

In the prior variation pattern determination process at the time of winning, first, the variation pattern table type determined by the prior variation pattern table type determination, the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), pre-special The type of the stopped symbol determined by the symbol determination is confirmed, and the variation table (variation mode determination table and variation pattern determination table) corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the variation mode number (variation mode type) is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read variation mode determination table.
Further, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read variation pattern determination table.

In the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of defeat, first, the type (“indefinite value” or “fixed value”) of the reach group random number included in the preliminary determination target game information is determined (preliminary random number type determination).
In this embodiment, "indefinite value" and "fixed value" are defined as the types of reach group random numbers.
"Indefinite value" is, at the time of acquisition (storage) of game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), a variation mode number (variation mode type), a variation pattern number (variation pattern type), is not determined, and when executing the start determination based on the game information, based on the number of reservations at that time (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number), the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern Number (variation pattern type) and reach group random number type to be determined.
"Fixed value" is, at the time of acquisition (storage) of game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), a variation mode number (variation mode type), a variation pattern number (variation pattern type), is the type of reach group random number that is determined.
In this embodiment, the reach group random number value is updated within the range of "0" to "10006". Among "0" to "10006", "0" to "8499" are set as "indefinite values", and "8500" to "10006" are set as "fixed values".
Therefore, in the pre-random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is less than "8500", it is determined as "indefinite value", and if it is "8500" or more, "fixed value ” is determined.

In the preliminary variation pattern determination process at the time of defeat, if the preliminary random number type determination is determined to be "indefinite value", the preliminary variation pattern table type determination described later, the preliminary reach group determination described later, the preliminary variation mode determination at the time of defeat, Move to the next process without executing
On the other hand, when the prior random number type determination is determined to be a "fixed value", the prior reach group determination and the prior variation mode determination are performed.

In prior reach group determination, reach group number (type of reach group) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which correspondence between reach group random numbers and reach group numbers (types of reach groups) is registered.
Also, as reach group determination tables, a reach group determination table corresponding to "indefinite value" and a reach group determination table corresponding to "fixed value" are stored.
In the reach group determination table corresponding to "indefinite value", the reach group number corresponding to "indefinite value" (hereinafter referred to as "indefinite value reach group") is registered as the reach group number. On the other hand, in the reach group determination table corresponding to the "fixed value", the reach group number corresponding to the "fixed value" (hereinafter referred to as "fixed value reach group") is registered as the reach group number.
In prior reach group determination, the reach group determination table corresponding to the "fixed value" is read. Then, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined based on the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read reach group determination table.
In the prior variation mode determination, first, the variation pattern table type determined by the prior variation pattern table type determination, the reach group number determined by the prior reach group determination, the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information (special figure 1 game information or Special figure 2 game information), check the value of the reservation number counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter or special figure 2 reservation number counter) corresponding to the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information, etc., and correspond to this confirmation result Read the fluctuation table (fluctuation mode determination table and fluctuation pattern determination table).
Then, the variation mode number (variation mode type) is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read variation mode determination table.
Further, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read variation pattern determination table.

In the advance determination process, next, a prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the look-ahead specification command setting process, a first look-ahead specification command that specifies the variation mode number determined by the prior variation mode determination, and a second look-ahead specification command that specifies the variation pattern number determined by the prior variation pattern determination. It is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 .
Specifically, when the winning prior variation pattern determination process is executed, the first look-ahead designation command that specifies the variation mode number determined by the winning prior variation mode determination and the winning prior variation mode determination Determined by A second prefetch designation command designating the variation pattern number obtained is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
On the other hand, when the pre-selection variation pattern determination process is executed, and if it is determined as a "fixed value" by the pre-random number type determination, the first look-ahead designation command for specifying the variation mode number determined by the pre-variation mode determination, and the pre- A second prefetch designation command designating the variation pattern number determined by the variation mode determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
On the other hand, when the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of failure is executed, and it is determined as "undefined value" by preliminary random number type determination, the first look-ahead designation command that designates "undefined value" and the second 2 prefetch designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

(Special game management processing)
Next, the special game management process of step S4-13 will be explained.
FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing special game management processing.
In this embodiment, the game (hereinafter referred to as "special game") executed based on the special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "special game") phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "special game phase") as "special symbol variation waiting state" , ``Special figure fluctuating state'', ``Special figure stop symbol display state'', ``First big prize opening pre-open state'', ``First big prize opening control state'', and ``First big prize opening Closing enabled state", "Waiting state for ending the opening of the first big prize winning opening", "State before opening the second big winning prize", "Controlled state for opening the second big winning prize", and "Closed the second big winning prize "effective state" and "waiting state for ending the opening of the second grand prize opening" are stipulated.
Then, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the "11" special game phases is set.
Also, the ROM 220 stores a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase as a special game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the special game.
Then, in the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and a process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, as shown in FIG. 43, the process first proceeds to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, special game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read.
In step S10-3, a special game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value obtained in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special figure fluctuation waiting state", the later-described special figure fluctuation waiting process is started, and the "special figure fluctuation state" If it is a value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation process described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state", the special figure stop process described later is started, If the value corresponds to the "pre-opening state of the first big winning opening", the processing before opening the first big winning opening, which will be described later, is started, and the value corresponds to the "control state of opening the first big winning opening". In this case, the first big winning opening opening control process to be described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "first big winning opening closing valid state", the first big winning opening closing effective process to be described later is started. If the value corresponds to the "first big winning opening end wait state", a first big winning opening ending waiting process to be described later is started, and corresponds to the "second big winning mouth opening pre-open state". If the value corresponds to the second big winning hole opening pre-processing described later, and if the value corresponds to the "second big winning hole opening control state", the second big winning hole opening described later is started. When the control process is started and the value corresponds to the "second big winning opening closing valid state", the second big winning opening closing valid process to be described later is started, and the "second big winning opening closing end wait state" is started. , a wait process for ending the opening of the second big winning opening, which will be described later, is started.

(Special figure fluctuation waiting process)
Next, the special figure variation waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a special figure variation waiting process.
When the special figure variation waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 44, the process first proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether or not the special figure reservation number is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the special figure reservation number is "1" or more (Yes), to step S11-2 If it is determined that the value of the special figure pending number is not "1" or more (No), the process proceeds to step S11-13.
Here, if the value of at least one of the special figure 1 reserved number counter and the special figure 2 reserved number counter is "1" or more, it is determined that the number of special figures reserved is "1" or more, both If the value of the counter is "0", it is determined that the number of special figures pending is not "1" or more.

In step S11-2, a special symbol storage area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-3. In the special symbol storage area shift process, the storage area in which the game information is stored is shifted.
In this embodiment, the game information (special figure 1 game information and special figure 2 game information) stored in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area and special figure 2 game information storage area) is acquired The start determination is executed in the order in which they were stored (in the order in which they were stored).
Here, the "start determination" includes a special figure per determination process (step 11-4), a special figure design determination process (step S11-5), a special figure stop design number determination process (step S11-7), and a special figure determination process (step S11-5). It is a series of judgment processing including figure fluctuation pattern judgment processing (step S11-8).
In the special symbol storage area shift process, first, of the special figure 1 game information storage area and the special figure 2 game information storage area, the game information storage area to shift the storage area is selected.
At this time, the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area, and the special figure 2 game information is not stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area In this case, the special figure 1 game information storage area is selected as the game information storage area to shift the storage area.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area and the special figure 1 game information is not stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area , the special figure 2 game information storage area is selected as the game information storage area to shift the storage area.
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area, and the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area In the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area and the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area, the first The game information storage area in which the game information obtained (stored) in the area is stored is selected as the game information storage area to shift the storage area.

In the special symbol storage area shift process, next, the storage area is shifted.
Specifically, when the special figure 1 game information storage area is selected as the game information storage area for shifting the storage area, the value specifying the game based on the special figure 1 game information as the special symbol discrimination flag set value (In this embodiment, "0") is set, and "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 pending number counter. In addition, it stores in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM230, a pending number designation command specifying that the special figure 1 pending number has decreased by "1". Furthermore, the storage contents of the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, clear (initialize) the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game information storage area is selected as the game information storage area to shift the storage area, the value specifying the game based on the special figure 2 game information (this In the embodiment, "1") is set, and "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter. In addition, a reservation number designation command specifying that the special figure 2 reservation number has decreased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM230. Furthermore, the storage contents of the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 2 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Next, clear (initialize) the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 2 game information storage area.

In step S11-3, setting abnormality determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the setting error determination process, occurrence of setting error is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is obtained. Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired setting value is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (“6” in this embodiment).
When it is determined that the obtained setting value is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (is equal to or greater than the predetermined setting comparison value), the value of the gaming machine state flag area (gaming machine state flag) of the RAM 230 is set to the setting abnormal state. Store (save) the corresponding value. Also, a subcommand specifying the occurrence of a setting error is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired setting value is less than the predetermined setting comparison value, the next process (step S11-4) is performed.

In step S11-4, a special figure hit determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the special figure hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special figure hit determination).
In the special figure hit determination process, first, the special figure big hit determination process is executed.
In the special figure big hit determination process, the special figure big hit lottery table is read. Then, based on the jackpot random numbers included in the game information (game information targeted for start determination) stored in the storage area 0 and the read special-pattern jackpot lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot". Determine whether or not (special figure jackpot determination).
Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, the result of the special pattern lottery is determined. It is judged as a "jackpot" (winning).
On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has not been won. do.
When it is determined that the "big hit" is not won by the special figure big hit determination process, the set value of the special symbol discrimination flag is confirmed. Then, when the set value of the special symbol determination flag=“0”, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined as “loss”. On the other hand, when the special symbol determination flag setting value = "1", the special symbol small hit determination process is executed.
In the special figure small hit determination processing, the special figure small hit lottery table is read. Then, whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a "small win" based on the value of the big win random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read special figure small win lottery table. To determine (special figure small hit determination).
Specifically, when the value of the big hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the value of the small hit registered in the special small prize lottery table, the special symbol lottery is executed. The result is determined as a "small hit" (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the special hit lottery table, the "jackpot" is won. judge not.
When it is determined that the "small hit" is not won by the special symbol small hit determination processing, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "lost".

In step S11-5, a special symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (special symbol determination).
Concretely, in the special figure design determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a "big hit" (winning) by special figure hit determination.
Then, when it is determined as a "big hit" (winning) by special figure hit determination, the type of "big hit design" is determined.
For this, when the set value of the special symbol discrimination flag=“0”, the first big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read first big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
On the other hand, when the set value of the special symbol discrimination flag=“1”, the second big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read second big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined as a "small hit" (winning) by the special hit determination, the type of "small hit design" is determined.
For this, the small winning symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read small winning symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the special figure hit determination, "missing design" is determined as the type of the stop design.
Next, a value corresponding to the determined stop symbol type is set in the special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230 .

In step S11-6, a pattern type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the symbol type designation command setting process, the symbol type designation command designating the type of the stop symbol determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-7, a special figure stop pattern number determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special figure stop design number determination process, the stop design number of the special design is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop symbol number lottery table in which correspondences between winning symbol random numbers and stop symbol numbers (segment data) are registered.
In addition, as stop pattern number lottery tables, a stop pattern number lottery table for big wins corresponding to "big hits", a stop pattern number lottery table for small wins corresponding to "minor wins", and a stop pattern number lottery table for losers corresponding to "losses". A pattern number lottery table is stored.
In addition, as a jackpot stop pattern number lottery table, a jackpot stop pattern number lottery table corresponding to the first special pattern (special figure 1 game information) and a jackpot time corresponding to the second special pattern (special figure 2 game information) A stop symbol number lottery table is stored.
In the special figure stop pattern number determination process, first, the result of the special figure hit determination is confirmed.
Then, when it is determined as a ``big hit'' (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the set value of the special symbol discrimination flag is confirmed, and the stop symbol number lottery table at the time of the big hit corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out big win stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the stop symbol number lottery table for the small hit is read. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read small winning stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the special figure per determination, the stop design number lottery table is read when losing. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read stop symbol number lottery table upon losing.
Next, the determined stop symbol number is stored in the stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230 .

In step S11-8, a special figure variation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, the variation mode of the special symbol (variation mode type and variation pattern type) is determined.
Concretely, with special figure fluctuation pattern decision processing, first, fluctuation pattern table classification decision processing is executed. In the variation pattern table type determination process, the variation pattern table type is determined (variation pattern table type determination).
Specifically, in the variation pattern table type determination process, first, the variation pattern table type determination table is read. In addition, the previous winning pattern, the reservation type of the game information stored in the storage area 0 (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the value of the first time saving counter, the value of the second time saving counter, the first special Check the information such as the value of the variation counter, the value of the second special variation counter, the number of special figures 1 reserved, the number of special figures 2 reserved. Then, the variation pattern table type determination table is referenced to acquire the variation pattern table type corresponding to the confirmed information.

In the special figure variation pattern determination process, next, the result of the special figure per determination is confirmed. And, if the result of the special figure hit determination is "missing" (lost), the special figure fluctuation state determination processing at the time of defeat, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination is "big hit" or "small hit" (winning), special figure variation mode determination processing at the time of winning, which will be described later, is executed.

In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, reach group determination process is first executed.
In the reach group determination process, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which correspondence between reach group random numbers and reach group numbers (types of reach groups) is registered.
In addition, as a reach group determination table, the type of reservation (type of game information stored in storage area 0 (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information)), the number of reservations, and the game state (execution of time saving control The reach group determination table corresponding to each combination of "during/stopped" is stored.
In the reach group determination, the set value of the special symbol determination flag, the number of reservations, and the game state are confirmed, and the reach group determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the reach group number is determined based on the reach group random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read reach group determination table.

In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, next, the variation mode determination process is executed.
In the variation mode determination process, a variation mode number (variation mode type) and a variation pattern number (variation pattern type) are determined.
Specifically, in the variation mode determination process, first, the variation pattern table type determined by the variation pattern table type determination, the reach group number determined by the reach group determination, the holding type of the game information stored in the storage area 0 (Special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the value of the reservation number counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter or special figure 2 reservation number counter) corresponding to the reservation type of the game information stored in the storage area 0 etc. are confirmed, and the variation table (fluctuation mode determination table and variation pattern determination table) corresponding to this confirmation result is read.
Then, the variation mode number (variation mode type) is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read variation mode determination table.
Also, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read variation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, in the winning special figure variation mode determination process, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and variation pattern number (variation pattern type) are determined.
Specifically, in the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of winning, first, the variation pattern table type determined by the variation pattern table type determination, the reservation type of the game information stored in the storage area 0 (special figure 1 game information or Special figure 2 game information), the type of the stop symbol determined by the special figure symbol determination, etc. are confirmed, and the variation table (variation mode determination table and variation pattern determination table) corresponding to this confirmation result is read.
Then, the variation mode number (variation mode type) is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read variation mode determination table.
Also, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read variation pattern determination table.

In step S11-9, a variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the variation pattern command setting process, the variation mode designation command that specifies the variation mode number (variation mode type) determined in step S11-8, and the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) determined in step S11-8 are specified. Stores the variation pattern specification command to the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-10, a special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special figure fluctuation time setting process, the time for the special symbol fluctuation display is set.
Specifically, in the special figure variation time setting process, first, the variation time 1 corresponding to the variation mode number determined in step S11-8, and the variation time 2 corresponding to the variation pattern number determined in step S11-8 get. Then, the acquired variable time 1 and variable time 2 are added to calculate the variable time. Then, the calculated fluctuation time is set to the special game timer.

In step S11-11, a special figure variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set to the special figure display timer.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", a predetermined initial value is set to the special figure 1 display symbol counter. By this, lighting control of the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display pattern counter is performed among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", a predetermined initial value is set to the special figure 2 display symbol counter. By this, lighting control of the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 2 display pattern counter is performed among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device.

In step S11-12, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure fluctuating state" is set.
In step S11-13, a customer waiting setting process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the customer waiting setting process, the demonstration designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

(Processing during special figure fluctuation)
Next, the processing during special figure fluctuation executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure fluctuation.
When the special figure fluctuation process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 45, the process first proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S12-2 If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S12-7.
In step S12-2, a special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-3. In the special figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.

In step S12-3, a special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-4. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure stop display data setting process, the stop design number stored in the stop design number storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter. Thereby, lighting control (stop display) is performed for the segment corresponding to the set stop design number among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter. Thereby, lighting control (stop display) is performed for the segment corresponding to the set stop design number among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device.

In step S12-4, a stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the stop designation command setting process, the stop designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a predetermined number (1 [times] in the present embodiment) is added to the value of the external information fixed number counter.
In step S12-5, a number cutting management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6. The number cutting management process will be described later.
In step S12-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state" is set.

In step S12-7, it is determined whether the value of the special figure display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12- 8, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S12-8, a special figure variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special figure fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data update process, when the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter.

(Number of cutting management processing)
Next, the number cutting management process executed in step S12-5 will be described.
FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the number cutting management process.
When the number cutting management process is executed in step S12-5, as shown in FIG. 46, the process first proceeds to step S28-1.
In step 28-1, it is determined whether or not special fluctuation is occurring, and if it is determined that special fluctuation is occurring (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-2, and if it is determined that special fluctuation is not occurring ( No), the process proceeds to step S28-9.
Here, if the value set in the special fluctuation flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", it is determined that special fluctuation is in progress, and if the value set in the special fluctuation flag area is "0", It is determined that there is no special fluctuation.

In step S28-2, it is determined whether or not the special symbol discrimination flag set value = "1", and the special symbol discrimination flag set value = "1" (the special symbol discrimination flag set value = "0") If it is determined (No), the process proceeds to step S28-3, and if it is determined that the special symbol discrimination flag set value = "1" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-6.
In step S28-3, a first special variation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-4. In the first special variation counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first special variation counter.
In step S28-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the first special variation counter is "0" or less, and if it is determined that the value of the first special variation counter is "0" or less (Yes) , the process proceeds to step S28-5, and when it is determined that the value of the first special variation counter is not less than "0" (is greater than or equal to "1") (No), the process proceeds to step S28-9.
In step S28-5, a special variation ending process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-9. In the special fluctuation end process, "0" is set in the special fluctuation flag area of the RAM 230. FIG. Also, "0" is set as the value of each special variation counter (first special variation counter, second special variation counter). This ends the special variation.

In step S28-6, a second special fluctuation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-7. In the second special variation counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second special variation counter.
In step S28-7, it is determined whether or not the value of the second special variation counter is "0" or less, and if it is determined that the value of the second special variation counter is "0" or less (Yes) , the process proceeds to step S28-8, and when it is determined that the value of the second special variation counter is not "0" or less (is "1" or more) (No), the process proceeds to step S28-9.
In step S28-8, a special variation ending process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-9. In the special fluctuation end process, "0" is set in the special fluctuation flag area of the RAM 230. FIG. Also, "0" is set as the value of each special variation counter (first special variation counter, second special variation counter). This ends the special variation.

In step S28-9, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is in progress, and if it is determined that the time reduction control is in progress (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-10, and if it is determined that the time reduction control is not in progress ( If No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-6).
Here, if the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", it is determined that the time saving control is in progress, and if the value set in the time saving control flag area is "0", It judges that it is not in time saving control.
In step S28-10, a second time saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-11. In a 2nd time saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of a 2nd time saving counter.
In step S28-11, it is determined whether the value of the second time saving counter is "0" or less (whether "time saving end condition 2" is satisfied), and the value of the second time saving counter is "0". If it is determined that it is not below ("time saving end condition 2" is not satisfied) (No), the process moves to step S28-12, and the value of the second time saving counter is "0" or less ("time saving end Condition 2” is established (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-18.
In step S28-12, it is determined whether or not the special symbol discrimination flag set value = "1", and if it is determined that the special symbol discrimination flag set value = "1" (Yes), step S28- 13, and when it is determined that the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is not "1" (the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "0") (No), the process moves to step S28-15.

In step S28-13, the first time saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-14. In a 1st time saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of a 1st time saving counter.
In step S28-14, it is determined whether the value of the first time saving counter is "0" or less (whether "time saving end condition 1" is satisfied), and the value of the first time saving counter is "0". If it is determined that it is not below (“time saving end condition 1” is not satisfied) (No), the process moves to step S28-15, and the value of the first time saving counter is “0” or less (“time saving end Condition 1” is established (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-18.
In step S28-15, it is determined whether or not the "small hit" is won, and if it is determined that the "small hit" is won (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-16, and the "small hit" is selected. If it is determined that the player has not won the lottery (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-6).
Here, when the value set in the special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the "small hit symbol", it is determined that the "small hit" is won, and is set in the special symbol determination flag area. If the present value is not a value corresponding to the "small winning pattern", it is determined that the "small winning" has not been won.

In step S28-16, a third time saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-17. In a 3rd time saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of a 3rd time saving counter.
In step S28-17, it is determined whether or not the value of the third time saving counter is "0" or less (whether or not "time saving end condition 3" is satisfied), and the value of the third time saving counter is "0". If it is determined that the following (“time saving end condition 3” is satisfied) (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-18, and the value of the third time saving counter is not “0” or less (“time saving end condition 3 is not established) (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-6).
In step S28-18, time saving control stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-19. In time saving control stop processing, "0" is set to the time saving control flag area of RAM230. In addition, "0" is set as the value of each time saving counter (first time saving counter to third time saving counter). Shortening of working hours control is stopped by this.
In step S28-19, special variation setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-20. In the special fluctuation setting process, “1” is set in the special fluctuation flag area of the RAM 230 . Also, "15" is set as the value of the first special variation counter. Furthermore, "4" is set as the value of the second special variation counter. Thereby, the special variation is started according to the start of the next special symbol variation display.
In step S28-20, a subcommand setting process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-6). In the subcommand setting process, a subcommand specifying a change in game state (stop of time saving control) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

(Processing during special stoppage)
Next, the special figure stopping process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure stop.
When the special figure stopping process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 47, the process first proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S13-2 If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S13-2, it is determined whether or not the type of the stopped design is a "big hit design", and if it is determined that the type of the stopped design is a "big hit design" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-3. When it is determined that the type of the stopped symbol is not the "big hit symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-8.
At step S13-3, game state update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-4. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, first, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 .
And when it determines with "1" being set to the time saving control flag area|region, while setting "0" as a value of a time saving counter, "0" is set to the time saving control flag area|region of RAM230. Shortening of working hours control is stopped by this.
On the other hand, when it determines with "1" not being set to the time saving control flag area|region ("0" is set), it transfers to the next process.
In step S13-4, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role item 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a second special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "jackpot symbol". Each second special electric role control table corresponds to the opening time, the closing effective time of the big winning gate, the closing time of the big winning gate, the ending time, the number of rounds (number of round games), and each round (round game). The number of opening/closing switching times, the control data (solenoid control data and control time data) of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switching, etc. are defined.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the second special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "jackpot symbol" determined in step S11-5 is read, and the read second special electric role control table is stored in the RAM 230 as a special electric role control table. Set in the electrical control table area.
Next, "0" is set in the counter for the number of times the special electric service has been continuously operated.

At step S13-5, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-6. In the opening time setting process, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
In step S13-6, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command designating the type of "jackpot pattern" determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a predetermined number (1 [times] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the external information jackpot number counter.
In step S13-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the second big winning opening" is set.

In step S13-8, it is determined whether or not the type of the stopped design is a "small winning design", and if it is determined that the type of the stopping design is a "small winning design" (Yes), step S13- 9, and when it is determined that the type of the stopped symbol is not a "small hit symbol" (a "losing symbol") (No), the process proceeds to step S13-13.
In step S13-9, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role item 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a first special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "small winning symbol". And, in each first special electric role control table, opening time, big winning mouth closing effective time, big winning mouth closing time, ending time, number of rounds (number of small winning games), each round (small winning game) , the control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 corresponding to the opening and closing switching of each time, the V area solenoid 66 corresponding to each round (small hit game) Control data (solenoid control data and control time data) and the like are defined.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the first special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "small winning symbol" determined in step S11-8 is read, and the read first special electric role control table is stored in the RAM 230. Set in the special electric role control table area.
Next, "0" is set in the counter for the number of times the special electric service has been continuously operated.

In step S13-10, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-11. In the opening time setting process, the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
In step S13-11, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-12. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command designating the type of "small winning pattern" determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-12, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening pre-open state" is set.

In step S13-13, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.

(1st Grand Prize Opening Pre-Processing)
Next, the pre-opening process for the first big winning opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the pre-opening process of the first big winning hole.
When the first big winning hole pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 48, the process first proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S14-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S14-2, special electric service continuous operation number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter.
In step S14-3, a round start specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start designation command setting process, a round start designation command designating the start of the round corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a process for setting the number of opening/closing switching times for special electric power is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric service open/close switching number setting process, the first special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the opening/closing switching number corresponding to the value of the special service continuous operation counter is set. read out. Then, the opening/closing switching frequency read out is set in the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter. Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric winning number counter.
In step S14-5, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening open control state" is set.

(First big prize opening control process)
Next, the first big winning hole opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the first big winning hole opening control process.
When the first big winning hole opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 49, the process first proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S16-2 If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service open/close switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S16-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service open/close switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric role winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S16-5, a special winning opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the big winning hole opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S16-6, a special winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the large winning opening closing valid time setting process, a predetermined large winning opening closing valid time (interval time) is set by referring to the first special electrical role control table set in the special electrical role control table area of the RAM 230 . Set the game timer.
In step S16-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end designation command setting process, a round end designation command designating the end of the round (small winning game) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening closed valid state" is set.

(1st Grand Prize Opening Closing Effective Processing)
Next, a description will be given of the first big winning opening closing valid process executed in step S10-3.
FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the first big winning hole closing effective process.
When the first big winning opening closing valid process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 50, the process first proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S17-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes ), the process proceeds to step S17-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S17-9.
Here, the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the number of rounds specified in the special electric role control table is obtained as a specified value to make a determination. conduct.
In step S17-3, it is determined whether or not the value set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", and it is determined that the value set in the V winning flag area is "1". If so (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-4, and if it is determined that the value set in the V winning flag area is "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S17-11.

At step S17-4, game state update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-5. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 .
Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the time saving control flag area, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the time saving counter, and the time saving of the RAM 230 is set. "0" is set in the control flag area. Shortening of working hours control is stopped by this.
On the other hand, when it determines with "1" not being set to the time saving control flag area|region ("0" is set), it transfers to the next process.

In step S17-5, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role item 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a second special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "small winning symbol". Each second special electric role control table corresponds to the opening time, the closing effective time of the big winning gate, the closing time of the big winning gate, the ending time, the number of rounds (number of round games), and each round (round game). The number of opening/closing switching times, control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switching are stipulated.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the second special electric role control table (for the big win) corresponding to the type of "small winning symbol" determined in step S11-5 is read, and the read second special electric role control table is read. (for big wins) is set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 .
Next, "0" is set in the counter for the number of times the special electric service has been continuously operated.

At step S17-6, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the opening time setting process, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
At step S17-7, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-8. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command designating the start of the jackpot game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the second big winning opening" is set.

In step S17-9, a big winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-10. In the big winning hole closing time setting process, the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined big winning hole closing time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-10, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening pre-open state" is set.

In step S17-11, ending time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-12. In the ending time setting process, the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-12, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-13. In the ending specifying command setting process, the ending specifying command specifying the end of the small winning game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-13, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening open end wait state" is set.

(Wait processing for ending the opening of the 1st big prize opening)
Next, the waiting process for ending the opening of the first big winning opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the wait process for ending the opening of the first big winning opening.
When the first big winning hole opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 51, the process first proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S18-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S18-2, a V non-winning designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the V non-winning designation command setting process, the V non-winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.

(Second Grand Prize Opening Pre-Processing)
Next, the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening.
When the second big winning hole pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 52, the process first proceeds to step S40-1.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S40-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S40-2, special electric service continuous operation number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-3. In the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter.
In step S40-3, a round start specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-4. In the round start designation command setting process, a round start designation command designating the start of the round corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S40-4, a process for setting the number of opening/closing switching times for special electric power is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-5. In the special electric service open/close switching number setting process, the second special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the opening/closing switching number corresponding to the value of the special service continuous operation counter is set. read out. Then, the opening/closing switching frequency read out is set in the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter.
Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric winning number counter.
In step S40-5, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S40-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "second big winning opening open control state" is set.

(Second Grand Prize Opening Control Processing)
Next, the second big winning opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the second big winning hole opening control process.
When the second big winning hole opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 53, the process first proceeds to step S41-1.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S41-2 If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S41-4.
In step S41-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S41-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service open/close switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-5.
In step S41-3, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S41-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric role winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (8 [ball] in this embodiment), and the value of the special electric role winning number counter reaches a predetermined value. If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-5. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S41-5, a special winning opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-6. In the big winning hole opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S41-6, a special winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-7. In the large winning opening closing effective time setting process, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined large winning opening closing valid time (interval time) is Set the game timer.
In step S41-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-8. In the round end designation command setting process, a round end designation command designating the end of the round game is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S41-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "second big winning opening closed valid state" is set.

(Second Grand Prize Opening Closing Effective Processing)
Next, a description will be given of the second big winning opening closing effective process executed in step S10-3.
FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the second big winning opening closing effective process.
When the second big winning opening closing valid process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 54, the process first proceeds to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S42-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S42-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes ), the process proceeds to step S42-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S42-6.
Here, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the number of round games specified in the special electric role control table is obtained as a specified value for determination. I do.

In step S42-3, ending time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-4. In the ending time setting process, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer.
In step S42-4, an ending specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-5. In the ending specifying command setting process, the ending specifying command specifying the end of the jackpot game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S42-5, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "second big winning opening open end wait state" is set.
At step S42-6, a special winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-7. In the big winning hole closing time setting process, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined big winning hole closing time is set in the special game timer.
In step S42-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the second big winning opening" is set.

(Wait processing for ending the opening of the second big prize opening)
Next, the waiting process for ending the opening of the second big winning opening, which is executed in step S10-3, will be described.
FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the waiting process for ending the opening of the second big winning opening.
When the second big winning opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 55, the process first proceeds to step S43-1.
In step S43-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S43-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S43-2, game state setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-3. In the game state setting process, the game state is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, first, the type of the stop symbol (“big win symbol” or “small win symbol”) and the game state at the time of executing the start determination are confirmed.
Then, when "big hit 1"("big hit pattern 1") is won by the start determination executed while the time saving control is stopped, "1" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and the second time saving counter is set. "5" is set as the value, and "1" is set as the value of the third time saving counter.
On the other hand, when the "jackpot 1"("jackpot pattern 1") is elected by the start determination executed during the execution of the time saving control, "12" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and the second time saving counter "16" is set as the value, and "1" is set as the value of the third time saving counter.
On the other hand, when the "big hit 2"("big hit pattern 2") is won by the start determination executed while the time saving control is stopped, "100" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and the second time saving counter "100" is set as the value, and "1" is set as the value of the third time saving counter.
On the other hand, when the "jackpot 2"("jackpot pattern 2") is elected by the start determination executed during the execution of the time saving control, "12" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and the second time saving counter "16" is set as the value, and "1" is set as the value of the third time saving counter.
On the other hand, when "big hit 3"("big hit pattern 3") is won, regardless of the game state at the time of execution of start determination, "100" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and the value of the second time saving counter is set. "100" is set as the value, and "1" is set as the value of the third time saving counter.
On the other hand, if you win "small hit 1" to "small hit 3"("small hit pattern 1" to "small hit pattern 3"), regardless of the game state at the time of execution of the start determination, the first time saving counter "12" is set as the value, "16" is set as the value of the second time saving counter, and "1" is set as the value of the third time saving counter.
In the game state setting process, next, "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM230. Time saving control is started by this. Also, "0" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230. FIG.

In step S43-3, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.

(Special electric service opening/closing switching processing)
Next, the special electric service open/close switching processing in steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5 and S41-3 will be described.
FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the special electric service open/close switching process.
When the special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5, and S41-3, as shown in FIG. 56, the process first proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S15-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service open/close switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S14-6 , S16-4, S40-6, S41-4).
In step S15-2, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric accessory 53a to be in the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control data setting process, the first special electric service control table or the second special electric service control table set in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the special service opening/closing operation is performed. Read the solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the switching number counter. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the control of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 is started based on the set solenoid data, and the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S15-3, a special electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric service control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control time setting process, the first special electric service control table or the second special electric service control table set in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the special service opening/closing operation is performed. Read the control time corresponding to the value of the switching number counter. Then, the read control time is set to the special game timer.
In step S15-4, a special electric power opening/closing switching frequency counter update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S14-6, S16-4, S40-6, S41-4). . In the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter.

(Normal game management processing)
Next, the normal game management process of step S4-14 will be explained.
FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing normal game management processing.
Here, in the present embodiment, the game (hereinafter referred to as "normal game") executed based on the normal symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "normal game") phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phase"), "normal pattern fluctuation waiting State", "Normal figure fluctuating state", "Normal figure stop pattern display state", "Normal figure electric accessory opening state", "Normal figure electric accessory open control state", "Normal figure electric accessory closed valid State” and “normal figure electric accessory open end wait state” are defined.
Then, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set.
Also, the ROM 220 stores a normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the normal game.
Then, in the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, as shown in FIG. 57, the process first proceeds to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, normal game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, normal game control module acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read.

In step S19-3, a normal game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, the process based on the normal game control module read in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value obtained in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state", the normal pattern fluctuation waiting process described later is started, corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation state" If it is a value, the normal pattern fluctuation process described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "normal pattern stop symbol display state", the normal pattern stop process described later is started, "Before opening normal electric accessories state”, the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the “normal electric accessary product opening control state”, the normal electric accessary product opening control process described later is performed. If it is a value corresponding to the "normal electric role product closed valid state", the normal electric role product closing valid process described later is started and the value corresponds to the "normal electric role product open end wait state" , The normal electric accessary product opening end wait process to be described later is started.

(Normal pattern change waiting process)
Next, the general pattern fluctuation waiting process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing normal pattern change waiting processing.
When normal figure fluctuation waiting processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 58, the process first proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether the value of the general pattern reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the general pattern reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes) , Move to step S20-2, if it is determined that the value of the normal figure pending number counter is not "1" or more (No), end the series of processes and move to the next process (step S4-15) do.

In step S20-2, normal figure reservation number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the general pattern reservation number update process, the general pattern reservation number is updated.
Concretely, in the general pattern reservation number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the general pattern reservation number counter.
Next, shift the storage area where the normal game information is stored. Concretely, the storage contents of the storage area 1 of the normal game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 2 of the general-purpose game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the general-purpose game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 3 of the general-purpose game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the general-purpose game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the general-purpose game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the general-purpose game information storage area. Next, clear (initialize) the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the normal game information storage area.

In step S20-3, normal figure hit-lose determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal pattern lottery determination process, the result of the normal pattern lottery is determined (normal pattern hit/loss determination).
The ROM 220 stores a normal symbol lottery table in which the winning values of the normal symbol lottery are registered. In addition, as the normal figure win-lose lottery table, the normal figure win-lose lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control and the normal figure win-lose lottery table corresponding to the stop of the time saving control are stored.
In this embodiment, the same winning probability (65535 / 65536 in this embodiment) is obtained in the normal figure winning lottery table corresponding to the stop of the time saving control and the normal figure winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control. As shown, the hit value is registered.
Then, in the general pattern hit-lose determination process, the hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0, the normal pattern hit-lose lottery table corresponding to the current execution status of the time saving control (during execution or stopped), Based on, the normal figure hit-lose judgment is performed.
Specifically, when the value of the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined as "winning" (winning).
On the other hand, when the value of the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined as "loss" (loss).

In step S20-4, normal pattern stop symbol determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal pattern stop symbol determination process, the type of the normal pattern stop symbol (stop symbol number) is determined (normal pattern stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the normal pattern stop design determination process, when it is determined that it is a "hit" (winning) by the normal pattern winning judgment, the "normal pattern per pattern" is set as the type of stop design (stop design number). judge.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the normal figure winning/losing determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number).
Next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 .

In step S20-5, normal figure fluctuation pattern determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the general pattern variation pattern determination process, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) in the normal pattern is determined (normal pattern variation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process, when the time saving control is stopped, the first type (4.0 The type corresponding to the fluctuation time of [s]) is determined.
On the other hand, when the time saving control is being executed, the second type (in the present embodiment, the type corresponding to the fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) as the type of normal figure fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) judge.

In step S20-6, normal figure fluctuation time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the general pattern fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type of general pattern fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) determined in step S20-6 is obtained. And, the acquired fluctuation time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, normal figure fluctuation display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the general pattern fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the general pattern display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal pattern fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the normal pattern display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the general pattern display symbol counter. As a result, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal pattern display symbol counter among the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal pattern display device is controlled to be lit.
Next, predetermined segment data is set as segment data corresponding to the normal map display device. As a result, lighting of the segment corresponding to the set segment data is controlled among the predetermined number of segments that constitute the normal map display device.
In step S20-8, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the ordinary game phase update process, in the ordinary game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "ordinary figure fluctuating state" is set.

(Normal map fluctuation process)
Next, the process during normal figure fluctuation executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing processing during normal pattern fluctuation.
When the normal figure fluctuation process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 59, first, the process proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2. Then, when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal map display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is "0" (Yes), step S21- 3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S4-15) is performed.
In step S21-3, normal figure fluctuation display data update processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal pattern fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the variable display of the normal pattern display device is updated.
Specifically, in the general pattern fluctuation display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the general pattern display symbol counter.

In step S21-4, a normal map stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the normal map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the normal map display device is set.
Specifically, in the general pattern stop display data setting process, the stop pattern number stored in the stop pattern storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, the acquired stop design number is set as the value of the general-purpose diagram display design counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments that constitute the normal-symbol display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal-symbol display symbol counter is controlled to light up (stopped display).
In step S21-5, normal figure stop time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal figure stop time setting process, the predetermined stop time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the ordinary game phase update process, in the ordinary game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure stop symbol display state" is set.

(Normal map stop processing)
Next, the process during normal figure stop executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing processing during normal map stop.
When the normal map stop process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 60, the process first proceeds to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S22-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stopped pattern is the "normal pattern per pattern", and if it is determined that the stopped pattern is not the "normal per pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. However, when it is determined that the stopped symbol is the "normal pattern winning symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure fluctuation waiting state" is set.
In step S22-4, normal electric service control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric role control data setting process, control data for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a normal electric work control table corresponding to the execution status of the time saving control (during execution or during suspension). In each ordinary electric duty control table, the time before opening the ordinary electric duty, the valid time for closing the ordinary electric duty, the waiting time for the end of opening, the number of open/close switching times, and the control data corresponding to each open/close switching (solenoid control data, control time, etc.) data), etc.
In the ordinary electric service control data setting process, the ordinary electric service control table corresponding to the execution status of the time saving control (during execution or being stopped) is read, and the read ordinary electric service control table is stored in the ordinary electric service control table area of the RAM 230. set.
Next, referring to the ordinary electric work control table set in the ordinary electric work control table area of the RAM 230, the opening/closing switching times are read out. Then, the number of open/close switching times read out is set in the normal electric open/close switching number counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the winning number counter for the ordinary electric role.

At step S22-5, a normal electric service pre-opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the ordinary electric role opening time setting process, the ordinary electric role control table set in the ordinary electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ordinary electric role opening time before the normal electric role opening is set in the ordinary game timer.
In step S22-6, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product opening pre-state" is set.

(Normal electric accessory opening preprocessing)
Next, the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessory opening preprocessing.
When the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 61, first, the process proceeds to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S23-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, normal electric open/close switching processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The ordinary electric open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product opening control state" is set.

(Normal electrical open/close switching process)
Next, the normal electric open/close switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the ordinary electric open/close switching process.
When the ordinary electric open/close switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 62, the process first proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is "0". If it is determined that the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is not "0" (No), , the process proceeds to step S24-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S23-3 Or move to S25-4).
In step S24-2, normal electric service control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the normal electric accessory 52a to be in an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric power control data setting process, the normal electric power control table set in the normal electric power control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal electric power open/close switching frequency counter is selected. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, control of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the normal electric accessory 52a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S24-3, normal electric service control time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric power control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control time setting process, the normal electric service control table set in the normal service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the control corresponding to the value of the normal service open/close switching frequency counter is performed. read out the time. Then, the read control time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, normal electric switch open/close switching frequency counter update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S23-3 or S25-4) is performed. In the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is newly set in the normal electric opening/closing switching number counter.

(Normal electric accessory opening control process)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessory opening control processing.
When the normal electric accessory opening control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 63, the process first proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S25-2 If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is "0". If it is determined that the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is not "0" (No) , the process proceeds to step S25-3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, normal electric open/close switching processing (see FIG. 62) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (3 [ball] in this embodiment), and the value of the normal electric winning number counter reaches a predetermined value. If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, normal electric power opening control end processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric power opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the normal electric accessory 52a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S25-6, normal electric service closing effective time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the ordinary electric role closing valid time setting process, the ordinary electric role closing valid time is set in the ordinary game timer by referring to the ordinary electric role control table set in the ordinary electric role control table area of the RAM 230 .
In step S25-7, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product closing valid state" is set.

(Normal electric accessory closing effective processing)
Next, the normal electric accessary product closing valid process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product closing valid processing.
When the normal electric accessary product closing valid process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 64, the process first proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S26-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
At step S26-2, an opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the opening end wait time setting process, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening end wait time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S26-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product open end wait state" is set.

(Normal electric accessory opening end wait process)
Next, the normal electric accessary product open end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product opening end wait processing.
When the normal electric accessary product opening end wait process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 65, the process first proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S27-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure fluctuation waiting state" is set.

(Performance display device control processing)
Next, the performance display device control processing at step S4-25 will be described.
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing performance display device control processing.
The performance display device control processing is processing based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 . That is, the performance display device control processing is processing based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220 . Performance display device control processing is called during execution of timer interrupt processing.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, as shown in FIG. 66, the process proceeds to step S38-1.
In step S38-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-2. In the register saving process, the values of all the registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to the saving area of the RAM. Also, the values of all stack pointers used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved in the save area of the RAM.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S38-11.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the game ready status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.
In step S38-3, total out counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the total count counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the OUT switch 109 has been detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the total out counter is not added.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not it is in a predetermined game state, and if it is determined that it is in a predetermined game state (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-5, and it is determined that it is not in a predetermined game state. If so (No), the process proceeds to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined game state" is a game state in which the time saving control is stopped and the jackpot game state is not generated.
In step S38-5, normal out counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out switch 109 has been detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the OUT switch 109 is detected, "1" is added to the value of the normal OUT counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the OUT switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the normal OUT counter is not added.

In step S38-6, normal prize ball counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball to the first start port 51. Add "4". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is not detected, the value of the normal ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball to the second start port 52. Add "1". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is not detected, the value of the normal ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the operation port switch 104 has been detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the operating port switch 104 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is added with "1", which is the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the operating port 54. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the operation port switch 104 is not detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the other winning port switch 106 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the other winning opening switch 106 is detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is added to the number of winning balls to be paid out according to the entry of game balls into the other winning openings 55a to 55e. 10" is added. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the other winning port switch 106 is not detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is not added.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), step S38-8. , and when it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-9.
In this embodiment, the reference value=60000×n (n=integer). "n" is a value indicating the current section, and is set to "1" as an initial value.
In step S38-8, section update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the section update process, first, the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to the base value buffer 2 of the RAM 230 .
Next, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal out counter. Also, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal winning ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current section. This updates the reference value.
At step S38-9, a base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal ball counter. Then, the calculated base ratio is stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 .
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal winning ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

At step S38-10, base ratio display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with an identification segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, which base ratio to display is selected from the base ratio of the current section and the base ratio of the previous section.
Then, when the display of the base ratio of the current section is selected, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set to Set to ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "b" (8 bits) is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data of "b" (8 bits) is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. , the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to The display data corresponding to the ones digit of is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 33 to 40, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 41 to 48, and the current state is displayed by the LEDs 49 to 56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio is displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64 .

On the other hand, if the display of the base ratio of the previous section is selected, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set to Set to ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "b" (8 bits) is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data of "c" (8 bits) is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. , the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to The display data corresponding to the ones digit of is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the character "b", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the character "c", and the LEDs 49 to 56 display the current A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio is displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64 .

In step S38-11, register restoration processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-12. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S38-1 (the value of the register used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the The value of the saved stack pointer (the value of the stack pointer used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.
At step S38-12, an interrupt permission process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-26). In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is released. As a result, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Processing executed by production control board 300)
Next, processing executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.

(Sub CPU initialization processing)
First, the sub-CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
A reset circuit (not shown) is arranged on the performance control board 300 . The reset circuit generates a reset signal when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.
CPU310 of the production|presentation control board 300 starts sub CPU initialization processing (not shown) according to generation|occurrence|production of the reset signal by a reset circuit.
In the sub CPU initialization process, the CPU 310 is initialized by initializing various registers, various timers, etc. used by the CPU 310 . Next, an effect random number update process for updating various random numbers for effect is executed. After that, the production random number update process is repeatedly executed until various interrupt processes, which will be described later, are executed.

(Command reception interrupt processing)
Next, command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 executes command reception interrupt processing (not shown) in response to reception of a control command from the main control board 200 .
In the command reception interrupt process, the control command received from the main control board 200 is stored (stored) in the reception buffer area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 .

(Sub timer interrupt processing)
Next, sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing sub timer interrupt processing.
The effect control board 300 is configured including a clock generation circuit. A clock generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal at predetermined intervals.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts sub-timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 67 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of clock pulses by the clock generation circuit. When the sub timer interrupt process is started, first, the process moves to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, register saving processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2. In the register saving process, the value of the register is saved in the saving area of the DRAM 304 .

In step S31-2, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, the values of various timers (effect scenario timer, etc.) included in the effect control board 300 are updated. Specifically, a predetermined value (a value corresponding to a predetermined period) is added or subtracted from the values of various timers.
In step S31-3, command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, the control command stored in the reception buffer of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the received control command is executed. The command analysis processing will be described later.

In step S31-4, time schedule management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. In the time schedule management process, the progress of production is managed based on the production scenario data set in the production scenario setting area and the value of the production scenario timer corresponding to the production scenario data.
Specifically, in the time schedule management process, it is determined whether or not there is process data whose start time has come for each of the production scenario data set in the production scenario setting area. When it is determined that there is process data whose start time has come, each instruction information (message) included in the process data is stored (stored) in the corresponding buffer area.
At this time, command information regarding the display effect (command information specifying the start of the display effect, command information specifying the end of the display effect, etc.) is stored in the display command buffer area.
On the other hand, the command information regarding the sound effect (command information specifying the start of the sound effect, etc.) is stored in the sound command buffer area.
On the other hand, the command information (command information specifying the start of the lamp effect, etc.) related to the lamp effect is stored in the lamp command buffer area.
On the other hand, the command information (command information specifying the start of the movable body presentation, etc.) related to the movable body presentation is stored in the movable body command buffer area.

In step S31-5, register return processing is executed, and the sub timer interrupt processing ends. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S31-1 is restored.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis processing in step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, as shown in FIG. 68, the process proceeds to step S32-1.
In step S32-1, a set value command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the setting value command reception process, it is determined whether or not a setting value specifying command has been received. And when it determines with having received the setting value designation|designated command, the value corresponding to the setting value which the said setting value designation|designated command designates is memorize|stored in the setting value storage area|region of DRAM304 of the production|presentation control board 300.

In step S32-2, a game state command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the game state command reception process, it is determined whether or not a game state designation command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the game state designation command has been received, various production flags are set.
In step S32-3, a pending command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4. The pending command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-4, prefetch command reception processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5. The prefetch command reception processing will be described later.
In step S32-5, variation command reception processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6. Variation command reception processing will be described later.
In step S32-6, a stop command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-7. The stop command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-7, an opening command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-8. The opening command reception processing will be described later.

At step S32-8, a game status command reception process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4).
In the game situation command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a game situation designation command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the game situation designation command has been received, a game situation setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game situation designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4) without executing the game situation setting process.
In the game situation setting process, the game situation designation command is analyzed.
Then, when the occurrence of the ready-to-fire state is designated by the game state designation command, a value (for example, "1 ”). In addition, an effect is started that suggests (informs) that the state of being ready to be fired is occurring.
On the other hand, when cancellation of the ready-to-fire state is designated by the game state designation command, a value (for example, "0 ”). In addition, the effect of suggesting (notifying) that the state of being ready to be fired is occurring is ended.

(Holding command reception processing)
Next, the pending command reception process of step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing pending command reception processing.
When the hold command reception process is executed in step S32-3, as shown in FIG. 69, the process proceeds to step S36-1.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not a hold number designation command has been received, and if it is determined that a hold number designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2, and a hold number designation command is issued. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether or not the hold number specifying command specifies an increase in the hold number (the hold number has increased by "1"). If it is determined that there is (Yes), the process moves to step S36-3, and the pending number designation command does not specify an increase in the pending number (designates that the pending number has decreased by "1") If so (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, a pending number addition process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the pending number addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the pending number designation command designates an increase in the special figure 1 pending number.
Then, if it is determined that the pending number designation command specifies an increase in the special figure 1 pending number, the value set in the special figure 1 pending number counter plus "1" is newly added Set to special figure 1 pending number counter. In addition, the normal pending effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 1 game information is started.
At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved design h, among the four display positions included in the reserved design display area b2, a storage area (storage area 1 to A display position corresponding to the storage area 4) is set. Here, the storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) in which the newly acquired special figure 1 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special figure 1 pending number counter.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pending number designation command specifies an increase in the number of special figures 2 pending, the value set in the special figure 2 pending number counter plus "1" is newly added Set to special figure 2 pending number counter. In addition, the normal pending effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 2 game information is started.
At this time, as the display area for displaying the reserved design h, among the four display positions included in the reserved design display area b3, the storage area in which the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is stored (storage area 1 to A display position corresponding to the storage area 4) is set. Here, the storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) in which the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter.

In step S36-4, a reservation number subtraction process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the reservation number subtraction process, first, it is determined whether or not the reservation number designation command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 1 reservation number.
Then, if it is determined that the reservation number designation command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 1 reservation number, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 1 reservation number counter is newly Set to special figure 1 pending number counter. Also, the display position of each reserved design h displayed in the reserved design display area b2 is shifted (moved).
Specifically, the pending effect corresponding to the pending symbol h displayed in the pending symbol display area b1 is ended. As a result, the display of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the finished reserved effect is ended.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 1 in the reserved design display area b2, the display position of the reserved design h is changed to the reserved design display area b2 (corresponding to the storage area 1). display position) to the reserved design display area b1.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 2 in the reserved design display area b2, the display position of the reserved design h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 2 to the storage area 1 Shift to the corresponding display position.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 in the reserved design display area b2, the display position of the reserved design h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 to the storage area 2 Shift to the corresponding display position.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 4 in the reserved design display area b2, the display position of the reserved design h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 4 to the storage area 3 Shift to the corresponding display position.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pending number designation command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 2 pending number, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 2 pending number counter is newly Set to special figure 2 pending number counter. Also, the display position of each reserved design h displayed in the reserved design display area b3 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the pending effect corresponding to the pending symbol h displayed in the pending symbol display area b1 is ended. As a result, the display of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the finished reserved effect is ended.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 1 in the reserved design display area b3, the display position of the reserved design h is changed to the reserved design display area b3 (corresponding to the storage area 1). display position) to the reserved design display area b1.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 2 in the reserved design display area b3, the display position of the reserved design h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 2 to the storage area 1 Shift to the corresponding display position.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 in the reserved design display area b3, the display position of the reserved design h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 to the storage area 2 Shift to the corresponding display position.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 4 in the reserved design display area b3, the display position of the reserved design h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 4 to the storage area 3 Shift to the corresponding display position.

(Prefetch command reception processing)
Next, the prefetch command reception processing in step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing prefetch command reception processing.
When the prefetch command reception process is executed in step S32-4, as shown in FIG. 70, the process proceeds to step S33-1.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not a prefetching designation command (first prefetching designation command, second prefetching designation command, and third prefetching designation command) has been received, and if it is determined that a prefetching designation command has been received (Yes ), the process proceeds to step S33-2, and when it is determined that the prefetch designation command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, prefetch information analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the look-ahead information analysis process, the information specified by the look-ahead specification command is stored in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 as pending information.
A suspension information storage area capable of storing suspension information is set in the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 . In addition, as a reservation information storage area, a first reservation information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 game information storage area of RAM 230) and a second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 game information storage area of RAM 230) ) is set.
The first pending information storage area includes storage areas 1 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing pending information. And, in the first pending information storage area, pending information corresponding to the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area is stored. That is, the pending information stored in the storage area 1 of the first pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 2 of the first pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 3 of the first pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 4 of the first pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area.
The second pending information storage area includes storage areas 1 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing pending information. And, in the second pending information storage area, pending information corresponding to the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area is stored. That is, the pending information stored in the storage area 1 of the second pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 2 of the second pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 2 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 3 of the second pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 4 of the second pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 4 of the special figure 2 game information storage area.
Each of the pending information includes pattern information indicating the type of stop pattern, the first variation information indicating the contents of the variation mode ("variation mode number" or "indefinite value"), and the contents of the variation pattern ("variation pattern number" or and second variation information indicating "indefinite value").

In the look-ahead information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
Then, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of stop design specified by the first look-ahead designation command ("lost design" or "jackpot p design ”), the contents of the variation mode specified by the second look-ahead specification command (“variation mode m” or “undefined value”), and the contents of the variation pattern specified by the third look-ahead specification command (“variation pattern n” or “ Analyze the symbol information corresponding to the type of the analyzed stop symbol, the first variation information corresponding to the contents of the analyzed variation mode, and the second corresponding to the contents of the analyzed variation pattern generating pending information including the variable information; Then, the generated pending information is stored (saved) in the first pending information storage area.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of stop design specified by the first look-ahead designation command ("lost design" or "jackpot p design ”), the contents of the variation mode specified by the second look-ahead specification command (“variation mode m” or “undefined value”), and the contents of the variation pattern specified by the third look-ahead specification command (“variation pattern n” or “ Analyze the symbol information corresponding to the type of the analyzed stop symbol, the first variation information corresponding to the contents of the analyzed variation mode, and the second corresponding to the contents of the analyzed variation pattern generating pending information including the variable information; Then, the generated pending information is stored (saved) in the second pending information storage area.
In the following description, the pending information stored in the pending information storage area in step S33-2 is referred to as "prefetch target pending information". In addition, among the pending information stored in the first pending information storage area, the pending information whose notification display (variable display and stop display) is executed prior to the prefetch target pending information is referred to as "preceding pending information".

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4, and the pre-reading notice effect is executed. If it is determined that the process is being executed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, "1" is set in the flag area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 during execution of the pre-reading notice effect. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed based on whether or not "1" is set in the pre-reading notice effect in-progress flag area.
In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5, and the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is not satisfied (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, (1) a predetermined number (in this embodiment, "2") or more preceding hold information is stored, (2) "normal reach fluctuation" or "super reach fluctuation" as the type of fluctuation pattern (3) that the jackpot game state is not occurring, it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied .
It should be noted that the content of the look-ahead advance notice effect execution condition can be changed as appropriate. That is, not all of the conditions (1) to (3) above, but when one or more of the above (1) to (3) are met, the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is determined as a configuration. I don't mind. In addition, other conditions different from the above conditions (1) to (3) may be included as the conditions for executing the preview effect. As other conditions, for example, (4) prefetch target pending information is the pending information corresponding to the special figure 1 game information, (5) it is possible to specify that the time saving control is stopped, etc. It's becoming

In step S33-5, a pre-reading notice effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the pre-reading notice effect lottery process, a pre-reading notice effect lottery is executed for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect lottery.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a pre-reading notice effect lottery table in which winning values of the pre-reading notice effect lottery are registered.
In the pre-reading notice effect lottery process, first, the reserved notice appearance designation information stored in the reserved notice appearance designation information setting area is confirmed. Then, when the non-appearance designation information is set in the reserved notice appearance designation information setting area, the prefetch notice effect lottery is not executed (it is decided not to execute the prefetch notice effect). On the other hand, when the appearance designation information is set in the pending notice appearance designation information setting area, a pre-reading notice effect lottery is executed.
In the pre-reading notice effect lottery, first, a pre-reading notice effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the obtained pre-reading notice effect lottery random number and the pre-reading notice effect lottery table. At this time, if the obtained pre-reading notice effect lottery random number matches the hit value (winning), it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect lottery, and the obtained pre-reading notice effect lottery random number matches the hit value. If there is none (failed), it is decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect lottery executed in step S33-5 has been won. If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect lottery has been lost (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

At step S33-7, a pre-reading notice effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the pre-reading notice effect setting process, the content of the pre-reading notice effect (holding notice effect) is set.
Specifically, in the look-ahead advance notice effect setting process, first, the pending final mode selection process is executed. In the final pending mode selection process, the final pending mode is selected and set.
“Final Suspension Mode” refers to the mode of the notice object pending symbol hy that finally changes in the pending notice performance.
The control ROM 302 of the effect control board 300 stores a final pending color lottery table in which the correspondence between the final pending mode lottery random number and the final pending mode is registered.
In addition, as the final holding mode lottery table, the final holding mode lottery table corresponding to each type of variation pattern is stored.
In the final pending mode selection process, first, a final pending mode lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation pattern indicated by the prefetch target suspension information is confirmed, and the suspension final mode lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, a final pending mode is selected (determined) based on the acquired final pending mode lottery random number and the read final pending mode lottery table.

In the look-ahead notice effect setting process, next, a pending change opportunity selection process is executed. In the pending change trigger selection process, a pending change trigger is selected and set.
The control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a hold change opportunity lottery table in which correspondence between a hold change opportunity lottery random number and a hold change pattern is registered.
The "holding change pattern" is information (scenario data) specifying a combination of holding change triggers.
In addition, as a hold change opportunity lottery table, a hold change opportunity lottery table corresponding to each combination of the special figure 1 hold number ("2" to "4") and the hold final mode is stored.
In the pending change opportunity selection process, first, a pending change opportunity lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the special figure 1 reservation number and the reservation final mode selected in the reservation final mode selection process are confirmed, and the reservation change opportunity lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the acquired pending change opportunity lottery random number and the read pending change opportunity lottery table, the pending notice performance number is determined (judged). Then, the performance scenario data corresponding to the determined pending notice performance number is read, and the performance scenario data thus read and the performance scenario timer corresponding to the performance scenario data are set in the performance scenario area.

In the look-ahead notice effect setting process, next, a pending change content selection process is executed. In the pending change content selection process, the pending change content corresponding to each pending change trigger is selected and set.
Specifically, in the pending change content selection process, as the pending change content corresponding to each pending change opportunity, there are a mode of the notice subject pending pattern hy before the change and a mode of the notice subject pending pattern hy after the change. set.
In the present embodiment, among the one or more hold change opportunities set in the hold change opportunity selection process, each hold change opportunity is selected in order from the hold change opportunity that arrives (occurs) later (later hold change opportunity). A pending change content corresponding to the change trigger is selected.
For example, if 3 [times] hold change trigger is set in the hold change trigger selection process, the third (final) hold change trigger, the second hold change trigger, and the first hold change trigger are performed in this order. , the hold change content corresponding to each hold change trigger is selected.
In addition, when selecting the content of the pending change corresponding to the pending change opportunity of each time, first, the aspect of the notice subject pending pattern hy after the change is selected, and then the aspect of the notice subject pending pattern hy before the change is selected. selected. At this time, as the mode of the notice target reserved design hy before the change, a mode with a lower degree of expectation than the mode of the notice target reserved design hy after the change is determined. As a result, the mode of the notice target retained pattern hy changes (promotes) to a mode with a high degree of expectation in accordance with the arrival of each pending change opportunity.
A control ROM 302 of a performance control board 300 stores a pending change content lottery table in which correspondence between a pending change content lottery random number and a mode of a notice subject pending symbol hy before change is registered.
Further, as a pending change content lottery table, a pending change content lottery table corresponding to each mode of the pending pattern h (mode of the notice subject pending pattern hy after change) is stored.
Then, in the pending change content lottery table corresponding to each aspect of the reserved pattern h (aspect of the notice subject reserved pattern hy after change), the notice subject reserved pattern hy after change is selected as the aspect of the notice subject reserved pattern hy before change. Only modes with low expectations are registered compared to the mode of .
In the pending change content selection process, first, among the pending change triggers set in the pending change trigger selection process, the pending change details are selected for the final pending change trigger. For this, first, the mode of the notice subject pending symbol hy after the change related to the final pending change trigger is selected. At this time, the final pending mode selected in the final pending mode selection process is selected as the mode of the notice target pending pattern hy after the change related to the final pending change opportunity. Next, the mode of the notice subject pending symbol hy before the change related to the final pending change opportunity is selected. For this, first, a pending change content lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the holding change content lottery table corresponding to the form of the notice target holding pattern hy after the change selected for the holding change opportunity of the final round is read. Then, based on the obtained pending change content lottery random number and the read pending change content lottery table, the state of the pre-notification target pending symbol hy related to the final pending change trigger is selected.
In the pending change content selection process, next, the pending change contents are selected for each pending change opportunity excluding the final pending change opportunity among the pending change opportunities set in the pending change opportunity selection process. At this time, the hold change contents corresponding to each hold change opportunity are determined in order from the hold change opportunity that arrives later.
In order to determine the content of the pending change corresponding to each pending change opportunity, first, the aspect of the notice subject pending pattern hy after the change related to the relevant pending change opportunity is determined. At this time, the mode of the pre-change notice subject reserved pattern hy already selected for the next pending change opportunity is selected as the mode of the notice subject reserved pattern hy after change related to the current pending change opportunity. Next, the aspect of the notice object pending symbol hy before the change related to the present pending change opportunity is determined. For this, first, a pending change content lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the holding change content lottery table corresponding to the mode of the notice target holding pattern hy after the change selected for the current holding change opportunity is read. Then, based on the obtained pending change content lottery random number and the read pending change content lottery table, the aspect of the pre-notification subject pending symbol hy related to the present pending change opportunity is selected.
In the pending change content selection process, next, the pending change content selected for each pending change opportunity is set in the area corresponding to the pending change opportunity in the production scenario setting area. Thereby, according to the arrival of each hold change opportunity, the state of the notice target hold pattern hy is changed (promoted) according to the hold change contents set for the hold change opportunity.

In the pre-reading notice effect setting process, next, “1” is set in the pre-reading notice effect in-progress flag area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 .
As described above, the suspension notice effect is started.
It is to be noted that "0" is set in the flag area for the pre-reading notice effect in-progress according to the end of the pending notice effect by a process (not shown).

(variation command reception processing)
Next, the variation command reception process of step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing variation command reception processing.
When the variation command reception process is executed in step S32-5, as shown in FIG. 71, the process proceeds to step S34-1.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined control command has been received. If it is determined that a predetermined control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2, and the predetermined control command is transmitted. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control command refers to a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command and a variation pattern designation command.
In step S34-2, stop effect determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, a stop effect number (mode of stop effect) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, a stop effect number (mode of stop effect) is determined based on the type of stop symbol specified by the symbol type designation command. Then, the determined stop effect number is stored in the stop effect number storage area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 .

In step S34-3, a variable effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the variable effect determination process, a variable effect number (mode of variable effect) is determined.
Concretely, in fluctuation production decision processing, first, first half fluctuation production decision processing which decides the first half fluctuation production number (mode of first half fluctuation production) is executed.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a first half variation performance lottery table in which the correspondence between a variation mode number (type of variation mode) and a first half variation performance number (mode of first half variation performance) is registered. .
In the first half variation performance determination process, first, the first half variation performance lottery table is read. Then, among the first half variation performance numbers registered in the first half variation performance lottery table, the first half variation performance number corresponding to the variation mode number specified by the variation mode designation command is determined (selected).

In the variable effect determination process, next, the second half variable effect determination process for determining the second half variable effect number (mode of the second half variable effect) is executed.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a second half variation performance lottery table in which correspondence between a variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) and a second half variation performance number (mode of second half variation performance) is registered. .
In the second half variation performance determination process, first, the second half variation performance lottery table is read. Then, out of the second half variation performance numbers registered in the second half variation performance lottery table, the second half variation performance number corresponding to the variation pattern number designated by the variation pattern designation command is determined (selected).

In step S34-4, a notice effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. In the announcement effect determination process, a main announcement effect number (mode of main announcement effect) is selected.
A control ROM 302 of a performance control board 300 stores a preliminary announcement performance lottery table in which correspondences between preliminary announcement performance lottery random numbers and main preliminary announcement performance numbers (modes of main preliminary performance) are registered.
Further, as a notice effect lottery table, a notice effect lottery table corresponding to each stop symbol number (various types of stop symbols) is stored.
In order to determine the aspect of the main notice effect, first, a notice effect lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the stop symbol number designated by the stop symbol designation command is confirmed, and the notice effect lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the main notice effect lottery number is determined (judged) based on the obtained notice effect lottery random number and the read-out notice effect lottery table.

In step S34-5, a variable effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variable performance setting process, the performance scenario data of the variable performance is set.
Specifically, in the variable effect setting process, the effect scenario data corresponding to the first half variable effect number determined in step S34-3 and the effect scenario data corresponding to the second half variable effect number determined in step S34-3 are set. read out.
Next, the performance scenario data read out is combined to generate the performance scenario data relating to the variable performance. Then, the generated production scenario data and the production scenario timer corresponding to the production scenario data are set in the production scenario setting area.
Also, the effect scenario data corresponding to the main notice effect number determined in step S34-4 is read. Then, the effect scenario data read out and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, the main notice effect is started at a predetermined timing during execution of the variable effect.

(Stop command reception processing)
Next, the stop command reception process of step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing stop command reception processing.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, as shown in FIG. 72, the process proceeds to step S35-1.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not a stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that a stop designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2, where the stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is no (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, stop effect start processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S32-7) is performed. In the stop effect start process, effect scenario data for the stop effect is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, the stop effect number stored in the stop effect number storage area is obtained, and the effect scenario data corresponding to the obtained stop effect number is read out. Then, the effect scenario data read out and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, the stop effect (stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2) is started.

(Opening command reception processing)
Next, the opening command reception processing of step S32-7 will be described.
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing opening command reception processing.
When the opening command reception process is executed in step S32-7, as shown in FIG. 73, the process proceeds to step S39-1.
In step S39-1, it is determined whether or not an opening designation command has been received, and if it is determined that an opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-2, where the opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is no (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8).
In step S39-2, a winning effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8). In the winning effect setting process, the effect scenario data of the winning effect is set.
Specifically, in the winning effect setting process, the winning effect number is selected according to the type of the stop symbol designated by the opening designation command. Also, the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected winning effect number is read. Then, the effect scenario data read out and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. Thus, the winning effect is started.

(Action of pachinko machine 1)
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game board 11ab having a design layer (cell sheet 11b) forming a design on the front surface, and game ball guiding members (left structure B1, right structure B2, upper It comprises a structure B3 and a lower structure B4) and display means (display screen 31a) provided on the rear surface of the game board 11ab. Also, the game board 11ab has a first opening (opening PH1) through which the display means can be visually recognized. In addition, the game ball guide member includes an eleventh game ball guide member (for example, the left structure B1) and a twelfth game ball guide member (for example, the upper structure B3) that guides the game ball so as not to enter the first opening. )It is included. Also, the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member cover the front end of the first opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the first opening. A predetermined gap (for example, gap G1) is provided between the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member to expose the front end of the first opening. A game ball cannot contact the front end of the first opening through a predetermined gap.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, the front end of the first opening is covered by the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the first opening. As a result, the front end (peripheral edge) of the first opening is pressed by the rear surfaces of the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member, making it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the game ball cannot contact the front end (periphery) of the first opening through the gap between the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member. This makes it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer due to contact of the game ball in the gap between the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide portion.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to suppress peeling of the design layer from the game board.

In the pachinko machine 1, a game board 11ab having a design layer (cell sheet 11b) forming a design on the front surface, and game ball guiding members (left structure B1, right structure B2) provided on the front surface of the game board 11ab , upper structure B3, lower structure B4, other winning structure B5, starting structure B6, etc.). In addition, the game board 11ab has second openings (openings PH3 to PH6) through which game balls can pass. In addition, the game ball guide member includes a 21st game ball guide member (another prize winning opening structure B5) that guides the game ball to flow into the second opening. The twenty-first game ball guiding member covers the front end of the second opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with a predetermined lower portion (covering portion) of the front end of the second opening.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost while preventing the design layer from peeling off the game board 11ab.
That is, when only suppressing peeling of the design layer from the game board 11ab is taken into consideration, it is preferable that the entire front end (periphery) of the second opening is covered with the 21st game ball guiding member. However, if the entire front end (periphery) of the second opening is covered with the 21st game ball guide member, the structure of the 21st game ball guide member becomes complicated, and the 21st game ball guide member is constructed. The amount of material required for manufacturing increases, increasing manufacturing costs.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the 21st game ball guiding member is configured to cover the front end of the second opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with a predetermined lower portion of the front end of the second opening. That is, a part of the front end (periphery) of the second opening is covered with the 21st game ball guiding member. As a result, the structure of the 21st game ball guide member can be simplified, and the amount of material required for constructing the 21st game ball guide member can be reduced, making it possible to reduce manufacturing costs. Become.
Here, if a predetermined portion of the front end (periphery) of the second opening is not covered by the 21st game ball guiding member, the predetermined portion may be affected by the contact of the game ball. Peeling of the design layer may occur.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a predetermined lower part of the front end (periphery) of the second opening is covered with the 21st game ball guiding member so that the game ball does not come into contact with it. In other words, a predetermined upper portion (non-covered portion NC) of the front end (periphery) of the second opening is not covered by the 21st game ball guiding member so that the game ball can come into contact with it. As a result, the front end (periphery) of the curled-up design layer is pressed by the weight of the game ball flowing into the ball entrance at a predetermined upper portion, thereby suppressing peeling of the design layer.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost while preventing the design layer from peeling off from the game board.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 includes a game board 11ab having a design layer (cell sheet 11b) forming a design on the front surface, and display means (fourth symbol display device 61) provided on the front surface of the game board 11ab. ing. The game board 11ab also has a third opening (opening PH2) through which a harness (electric wire) extending from the display means is inserted. The display means covers the entire opening edge (front end) of the third opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with the opening edge (front end) of the third opening.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, the entire front end of the third opening is covered by the display means so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the third opening. As a result, the entire front end (periphery) of the third opening is pressed by the back surface of the display means, making it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 includes a game board 11ab having a design layer (cell sheet 11b) forming a design on the front surface, and a prize winning device (composite prize winning device 70) provided on the front surface of the game board 11ab. . In addition, the game board 11ab has a fourth opening (opening PH7) through which a game ball that has entered the winning device is passed. The winning device covers the entire opening edge (front end) of the fourth opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with the opening edge (front end) of the fourth opening.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, the entire front end of the fourth opening is covered by the winning device so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the fourth opening. As a result, the entire front end (peripheral edge) of the fourth opening is pressed by the back surface of the prize winning device, making it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 includes a game board 11ab having a design layer (cell sheet 11b) forming a design on the front surface, and a game ball guide member provided on the front surface of the game board 11ab. Also, the game board 11ab has a fifth opening (opening PH8). The game ball guide member includes a 51st game ball guide member (starting opening structure B6) that guides the game ball to pass through the fifth opening. The 51st game ball guiding member covers the entire opening edge (front end) of the fifth opening so that the game ball does not contact the opening edge (front end) of the fifth opening.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, the entire front end of the fifth opening is covered by the 51st game ball guiding member so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the fifth opening. As a result, the entire front end (peripheral edge) of the fifth opening is pressed by the back surface of the 51st game ball guide member, making it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 includes a game board 11ab having a design layer (cell sheet 11b) forming a design on the front surface, and a game ball guide member provided on the front surface of the game board 11ab. Also, the game board 11ab has a sixth opening (opening PH9). In addition, the game ball guide member includes a 61st game ball guide member (starting opening structure B6) and a 62nd game ball guide member (inner rail 12) that guide the game ball to pass through the sixth opening. ing. Also, the 61st game ball guide member and the 62nd game ball guide member cover the front end of the sixth opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the sixth opening. A gap G4 is provided between the 61st game ball guide member and the 62nd game ball guide member to expose the front end of the sixth opening. A game ball cannot contact the front end of the sixth opening through the gap G4.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, the front end of the sixth opening is covered by the 61st game ball guide member and the 62nd game ball guide member so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the sixth opening. As a result, the front end (periphery) of the sixth opening is pressed by the rear surfaces of the 61st game ball guide member and the 62nd game ball guide member, making it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the game ball cannot contact the front end (periphery) of the sixth opening through the gap G4 between the 61st game ball guide member and the 62nd game ball guide member. This makes it possible to suppress peeling of the design layer due to contact of the game ball in the gap G4 between the 61st game ball guide member and the 62nd game ball guide member.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to suppress peeling of the design layer from the game board.

(Modification)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, various modifications can be made to the above embodiments.
For example, in the above embodiment, the design layer according to the present invention is composed of the cell sheet 11b. That is, the cell sheet 11b is attached to the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 11a, so that the design layer is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the game substrate 11ab.
However, the design layer according to the present invention may be composed of paint, paint, and ink. That is, a design layer may be provided on the front surface (front surface) of the game substrate 11ab by drawing a design with paint, coating, or ink on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 11a.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first opening according to the present invention is configured by the opening PH1. That is, it has an eleventh game ball guide member and a twelfth game ball guide member that guide the game ball so as not to enter the opening PH1 that makes the display screen 31a visible. Also, the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member cover the front end of the opening PH1 so that the game ball does not come into contact with the front end of the opening PH1. Further, a gap G1 is provided between the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member, through which the front end of the opening PH1 is exposed. A game ball cannot contact the front end of the opening PH1 through the gap G1.
However, the first opening according to the present invention is different from other openings (opening PH2 for arranging the fourth symbol display device 61, openings PH3 to PH6 constituting other winning openings 55a to 55e, composite winning device 70 , the opening PH8 forming the first starting port 51, the opening PH9 forming the out port 58, etc.).
That is, an eleventh game ball guide member and a twelfth game ball guide member are provided to guide the game ball so as not to enter other openings (openings PH2 to PH9, etc.). In addition, the 11th game ball guide member and the 12th game ball guide member are arranged so that the game ball does not contact the front ends of other openings (openings PH2 to PH9, etc.). etc.). Further, between the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member, a predetermined gap is provided to expose the front ends of other openings (openings PH2 to PH9, etc.). The game ball is configured so as not to contact the front ends of other openings (openings PH2 to PH9, etc.) through a predetermined gap.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second opening according to the present invention is composed of the openings PH3 to PH6. That is, it has a 21st game ball guiding member for guiding the game ball to pass through the openings PH3 to PH6. The twenty-first game ball guiding member covers the front ends of the openings PH3 to PH6 so that the game ball does not come into contact with predetermined lower portions of the front ends of the openings PH3 to PH6. Further, a predetermined upper portion (non-covered portion NC) of the front ends (peripherals) of the openings PH3 to PH6 is not covered by the 21st game ball guide member so that the game ball can come into contact with it. ing.
However, the second opening according to the present invention is different from other openings (the opening PH7 for arranging the composite winning device 70, the opening PH8 constituting the first start opening 51, the opening PH9 constituting the out opening 58). etc.).
That is, a 21st game ball guiding member is provided for guiding the game ball so as to pass through the other openings (openings PH7 to PH9). Then, the 21st game ball guiding member is arranged so that the game ball does not contact a predetermined lower part of the front ends of the other openings (openings PH7 to PH9) of the other openings (openings PH7 to PH9). The front end is covered. In addition, a predetermined upper portion (non-covered portion NC) of the front end (periphery) of the other openings (openings PH7 to PH9) is covered by the 21st game ball guide member so that the game ball can come into contact. The configuration shall be one that is not

1 pachinko machine 11 game board 11a substrate 11b cell sheet 51 first starting port 52 second starting port 55a-55f other prize winning ports 58 out port 61 fourth symbol display device 70 composite winning device B1 left structure B2 right structure B3 top Structure B4 Lower structure B5 Other winning structure B6 Starting structure G1-G4 Gap PH1-PH9 Opening

Claims (2)

a game board having a design layer forming a design on the front surface;
a game ball guiding member provided on the front surface of the game board;
and a display means provided on the rear surface of the game board,
The game board has a first opening that makes the display means visible,
The game ball guiding member includes an eleventh game ball guiding member and a twelfth game ball guiding member that guide the game ball so as not to enter the first opening,
The eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member cover the front end of the first opening so that the game ball does not contact the front end of the first opening,
A predetermined gap is provided between the eleventh game ball guide member and the twelfth game ball guide member,
The game machine is characterized in that the game ball cannot come into contact with the front end of the first opening through the predetermined gap. a game board having a design layer forming a design on the front surface;
A game ball guiding member provided on the front surface of the game board,
The game board has a second opening through which game balls can pass,
The game ball guide member includes a 21st game ball guide member that guides the game ball to flow into the second opening,
The gaming machine, wherein the twenty-first game ball guide member covers the front end of the second opening so that the game ball does not come into contact with a predetermined lower part of the front end of the second opening.

Images